You are on page 1of 283

Negotiation

Wise Up Online
Chapters Chapters

1 What is negotiation? p. 03

2 The Lose-Lose Outcome p. 33

3 The Win-Lose Outcome p. 59

4 Compromise p. 86

5 Relationships p. 107

6 Objectives p. 130

7 The Win-Win Outcome p. 155

Arquivo Interativo.
Interações no menu ao
8 Grammar Guide p. 179
lado, topo e base das
páginas, e nas indicações
do Grammar Guide no
final de cada lesson.
1
What
What is
is
negotiation?
negotiation?
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 1.

In this chapter, you will learn some important concepts about negotiation, some
idiomatic expressions and phrasal verbs, as well as examples of word formation
with suffixes. You will also learn some important vocabulary and grammar topics
to make it happen.
Now, look at the script of What is negotiation?

WHAT IS NE GOTIATION?

When most people hear the word negotiation, they immediately think of
adjectives such as heavy, fierce, or tough collocating with it.

If they were to think of related words, they would probably go for


competition, battle, fight.

And one verb would definitely rank as number one in most people’s
minds: to win.

People wanna win a negotiation as much as they wanna win a tough


competition or a fierce battle. And they want to win them all. They want
to run the table.

But is it possible? For someone to win, doesn’t it necessarily mean


someone else will lose? Is there a single way people can get to win
every negotiation agreement into which they engage?

Well, let me answer this question right up front: Yes, there is.

And, in this series, I’ll show you how we can walk this path…together.

But before we start our journey, we need to fully understand what


negotiation is. A negotiation agreement takes place whenever two or
more people have different or even opposing interests, and they need to
reach an agreement.

And if major business transactions or multimillionaire commercial


agreements came to your mind when you heard the definition, you are
not wrong. They too are negotiation agreements.

< voltar para o índice


4
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

But let’s set the record straight here: most people will spend their whole
life without ever engaging in such major agreements. And you might
be one of those people. That is all right; it does not make you less of a
negotiator.

Negotiation is part of everybody’s everyday life. We negotiate all the


time, because people have different points of view on various subjects,
and more often than not, not only do we need, but we want to reach
common ground.

You negotiate when your workmate and you have different points of
view on a deadline, you negotiate when you bargain for a product with
a seller. You negotiate on a Friday night if your spouse and you simply
want to watch different movies.

But, hey, when you negotiate with your spouse, kids, relatives, friends,
or even co-workers, do you want your interest to prevail at any cost?
Well, winning a negotiation is having your interests met, but would it
make you happy to watch a movie you really enjoy having your partner
dead bored by your side? Maybe even a bit upset? Is that really winning?

And this is how we get to another aspect of every negotiation


agreement that we tend to take for granted: relationships.

Yes, in every negotiation there are opposing objectives – other than that,
there’s no need to negotiate. But there is always more than one person
involved, and whenever at least two people are interacting, there are
also emotions and a relationship that should be taken care of.

These are key concepts of a negotiation agreement and every


great negotiator’s goals: to achieve your interests and improve your
relationships.

O QUE É NE GOCIAÇÃO?

Quando a maioria das pessoas ouve a palavra negociação, elas


imediatamente pensam em adjetivos como pesada, acirrada ou difícil
combinando com ela.

Se fossem pensar em palavras relacionadas, provavelmente pensariam


em competição, batalha, luta.

< voltar para o índice


5
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

E um verbo definitivamente ficaria em primeiro lugar na mente da


maioria das pessoas: ganhar.

As pessoas querem ganhar uma negociação tanto quanto querem


ganhar uma competição difícil ou uma batalha acirrada. E elas querem
ganhar todas. Elas querem dominar o jogo.

Mas será possível? Para que alguém ganhe, não significa


necessariamente que outra pessoa vai perder? Existe algum jeito de as
pessoas ganharem todas as negociações das quais participam?

Bem, deixe-me responder essa pergunta logo de cara: Sim, existe.

E, nesta série, vou mostrar como podemos trilhar esse caminho… juntos.

Mas antes de começarmos nossa jornada, precisamos entender


exatamente o que é negociação. Um acordo em uma negociação ocorre
sempre que duas ou mais pessoas têm interesses diferentes ou até
mesmo opostos, e precisam chegar a um acordo.

E se grandes transações comerciais ou acordos comerciais


multimilionários vieram à sua mente quando você ouviu a definição,
você não está errado. Eles também são negociações.

Mas vamos esclarecer as coisas aqui: a maioria das pessoas vai passar
a vida toda sem nunca se envolver em negociações desse porte. E pode
ser que você seja uma dessas pessoas. Está tudo bem; isso não torna
você menos negociador.

Negociações são parte do cotidiano de todos. Nós negociamos o


tempo todo porque as pessoas têm diferentes pontos de vista em
diversos assuntos e, na maioria das vezes, não apenas precisamos, mas
queremos chegar a um meio-termo.

Você negocia quando você e seu colega de trabalho têm pontos de vista
diferentes com relação a um prazo, você negocia quando pechincha um
produto com um vendedor. Você negocia numa sexta-feira à noite se
você e seu cônjuge simplesmente querem assistir a filmes diferentes.

Mas, ei, quando você negocia com seu cônjuge, filhos, parentes,
amigos, ou mesmo colegas de trabalho, você quer que seu interesse
prevaleça a qualquer custo? Bem, ganhar uma negociação é ter seus
interesses atendidos, mas você ficaria feliz em assistir a um filme que
você realmente gosta com seu parceiro morrendo de tédio ao seu lado?
Talvez até um pouco chateado? Isso é mesmo ganhar?

< voltar para o índice


6
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

E é assim que chegamos a outro aspecto de todo acordo em uma


negociação que geralmente não valorizamos: relacionamentos.

Sim, em todas as negociações há objetivos opostos – do contrário,


não há necessidade de se negociar. Mas sempre há mais de uma
pessoa envolvida, e sempre que pelo menos duas pessoas estiverem
interagindo, haverá também emoções e um relacionamento que deve
ser bem cuidado.

Estes são conceitos-chave de um acordo em uma negociação e as


metas de todo grande negociador: alcançar seus interesses e melhorar
seus relacionamentos.

< voltar para o índice


7
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 2.

In this part of the chapter, we will talk about negotiation and learn about phrasal verbs,
idiomatic expressions, and other important points. First, let’s talk about negotiation itself.

A negotiation agreement takes place whenever two or more people have different or
even opposing interests, and they need to reach an agreement.
Um acordo em uma negociação ocorre sempre que duas ou mais pessoas têm interesses
diferentes ou até mesmo opostos, e precisam chegar a um acordo.

In the sentence, note that we have two words with suffixes, which
are letters added to the end of words in order to create new words.
The first of these is the noun negotiation, in which we have the
suffix -ION. Next, we have agreement, which contains the suffix
-MENT. These suffixes are commonly used to form nouns. But not
all nouns are formed with suffixes, such as people, which is the
irregular plural of person, also used in the sentence.
Here, we can also see the adverb whenever, which is formed by
when and ever and means “every or any time”. There is yet another
adverb, even, which is used to add emphasis.
Now, let’s focus on the verbs. The first one to appear is to take VERBS
place:
to take place
acontecer

Observe that it is formed by the verb to take and the noun place,
two unrelated words. This is because to take place is an idiomatic
expression, that is, a group of words whose meaning considered
as a unit is different from the meanings of each word considered
separately.
The other verb in the sentence is to have: VERBS

to have
ter

< voltar para o índice


8
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

When complemented by a noun, this verb indicates ownership. In this case, the
complement is different or even opposing interests. Note that different and
opposing are adjectives that qualify the noun interests, placed right before it.
Even though adjectives may qualify a plural noun, they do not have a plural form;
they are invariable.
The other verbs in the sentence are as follows:

VERBS

to need to reach an agreement


precisar/necessitar chegar a um acordo

The verb to reach can be followed by different complements.


However, when we say reach an agreement the idea it has is the
same as to compromise.
Another verb you can use in this context is to negotiate. VERBS

to negotiate
negociar

The noun negotiation comes from this verb. Within the context of business, it
means to discuss something in order to achieve a goal. For example:

The opposing parties negotiate the terms of the agreement.


As partes opostas negociam os termos do acordo.

They need to negotiate a new contract with the suppliers.


Elas precisam negociar um novo contrato com os fornecedores.

When we choose to use the preposition with, we must specify the other party
involved in the negotiation. In the previous example, it is the suppliers, which is the
plural form of supplier – a person or company that provides a service or a product.

< voltar para o índice


9
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Now, let’s bring back the verbs we have outlined from the opening sentence and
analyze them in different examples and contexts.
The first one is the idiomatic expression to take place. Take a look:

The meetings take place every Thursday.


As reuniões ocorrem/acontecem toda quinta-feira.

To take place could be replaced by the verbs to happen or to occur. Observe


that meetings is the plural form of meeting, which is a formal event where people
gather to discuss something.
You have also seen the verb to have, which indicates ownership when followed
by a noun. One construction you can use with this verb is to have an interest,
which means to be interested in something. For example:

Mary has an interest in this job opening.


Mary tem interesse nesta vaga de trabalho.

Here, we have the subject, Mary, first person singular, followed by the expression
to have an interest, which is conjugated according to the subject as has. In this
sentence, the word interest is a noun.
But it can also be a verb:

VERBS

to interest
interessar

For example:

This job opening interests Mary.


Esta vaga de trabalho interessa à Mary.

< voltar para o índice


10
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

In the previous example, the subject becomes this job opening, and Mary
becomes the complement. The verb to interest is conjugated according to the
subject in the third person singular. The meaning of this sentence is the same as
the one we saw as an example with the expression to have an interest. What
changes is the function of the word interest.
There is another way of expressing the same idea, turning the word interest into
the adjective interested. Observe the examples:

Mary is interested in the job opening.


A Mary está interessada na vaga de trabalho.

Mary and Josh are interested in the job opening.


A Mary e o Josh estão interessados na vaga de trabalho.

In both previous examples, we have the adjective interested in the construction


to be interested in, which is the same as to have an interest in. Note that, in
both sentences, the verb to be agrees with the subject: in the first case, the
subject is Mary, third person singular, so the verb is conjugated as is; in the
second sentence, the subject is plural, Mary and John, and the verb is conjugated
in the third person plural, are. Remember that adjectives do not have a plural
form.
It is important not to have only our own interests in mind during a negotiation,
no matter what they are. As you have seen, all it takes is at least two people with
different interests who need to reach an agreement.
Negotiations can then occur in multiple situations, such as:

When your workmate and you have different points of view on a


deadline.
Quando você e seu colega de trabalho têm pontos de vista diferentes com
relação a um prazo.

In this sentence, note the word workmate, which is formed by two nouns:
work and mate. Here, mate is the same as colleague or friend. Workmate is
a compound noun used to refer to someone who works with you. Moreover,
notice that points of view, which is the same as perspectives, is followed by the
preposition on. Deadline is another compound noun, formed by the words dead
and line. Here, dead means end, that is, deadline is the date by which something
must be delivered.

< voltar para o índice


11
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Negotiations are not exclusive to the business world. They are also part of our
everyday lives. One example is:

When you bargain for a product with a seller.


Quando você pechincha um produto com um vendedor.

Here, we have the verb to bargain, which is to try to reach an agreement with
someone in order to get a lower price. In the case of this sentence, what is being
negotiated is a product. Next, we have the noun seller, the person who sells things.
This word is formed by the verb to sell and the suffix -ER.
Suffixes are letters added to the end of words to form another word with a related
meaning. A word formed by a verb and the suffix -ER, for example, refers to the one
who performs the action described by that verb. Take a look at other examples:

SUFFIX -ER

to supply + -er = supplier to teach + -er = teacher


fornecer fornecedor ensinar professor

to drive + -er = driver to buy + -er = buyer


dirigir motorista comprar comprador

In all previous examples, we used the verb and added -ER to it to refer to the one
who performs that action. However, be aware that this is not a rule for all verbs.
Another common example of negotiation in our daily lives is as follows:

When your spouse and you want to watch different movies.


Quando seu cônjuge e você querem assistir a filmes diferentes.

< voltar para o índice


12
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

In this sentence, we are talking about negotiations in marriage. Note that spouse
is a gender-neutral noun, referring to an individual of a married couple. So, it can
either refer to the husband or the wife. Next, we have two verbs, want to watch.
The first verb, to want, is conjugated in the third person plural of simple present,
and the next verb, to watch, is in the infinitive. Note that when the verb to want
is followed by another verb, the latter will be in the infinitive form.
Analyzing the situations previously described, it gets clear that negotiations
happen when an agreement is needed, be it in business or your personal life. In
other words:

In every negotiation there are opposing objectives – other than that,


there is no need to negotiate.
Em toda negociação existem objetivos opostos – do contrário, não há
necessidade de se negociar.

In the previous example, the verbs there are and there is are used to convey
existence. The infinitive form is there be and it must be conjugated according to
the noun that follows it. There are is plural and there is, singular.
If every negotiation involves parties with opposing interests trying to achieve
their goals, we can conclude that negotiations are delicate, with each party
having a tendency to defend their own points of view. That is why many see
negotiations as:

NOUNS

a battle a fight a competition


uma batalha uma luta uma competição

As you can see, the previous words are nouns commonly related to negotiations.
Now, take a look at some adjectives we can use to describe it:

ADJE CTIVES

strong fierce tough


forte acirrada dura/árdua

difficult long/lengthy/protracted
difícil longa/demorada/prolongada

< voltar para o índice


13
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Now, let’s use some of the adjectives from the previous list to build sentences.
Have a look:

Sometimes a negotiation is a fierce battle.


Às vezes uma negociação é uma batalha acirrada.

She needs to prepare for a difficult, long negotiation.


Ela precisa se preparar para uma negociação longa e difícil.

In the first sentence, we have negotiation as a battle, which is being


characterized by the adjective fierce. In the second example, we have the verb
to need, followed by another verb, to prepare. There are two adjectives in this
sentence, difficult and long. Note again the position of these adjectives in the
sentences: they come before the nouns they describe.
As mentioned before, adjectives usually appear before the noun, but that is not
a strict rule. Sometimes, the adjective comes between a noun and a verb, and a
verb that is often used to talk about characteristics is the verb to be. Check out
this example:

Protracted negotiations are tough for everybody.


Negociações demoradas são difíceis para todo mundo.

Note that there are two adjectives here: protracted, right before the noun
negotiations, and the adjective tough also referring to negotiations, but after the
verb to be, conjugated as are. Even though negotiations is plural, remember that
adjectives are invariable, regardless of their position in the sentence.
One of the things that can make negotiations difficult and long is the fact that no
one wants to lose. The opposite of this verb is to win.
Take a look at some examples with these verbs shown as opposites:

You win some, you lose some.


Às vezes se ganha, outras, se perde.

< voltar para o índice


14
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

The previous example is an expression commonly used to comfort someone who


loses something, conveying to them the idea that, for someone to win, others
have to lose.
Now, take a look at an example with the verb to lose:

Every month, we lose customers to cheaper rivals.


Todo mês, perdemos clientes para rivais mais baratos.

In the previous sentence, the verb to lose is referring to customers. When you
lose a customer, it means you do not have them anymore. Observe the word
cheaper, the comparative form of the adjective cheap. It is used to describe
something that does not cost much money. Notice it is formed with the same
suffix we have seen previously, -ER, but now it serves a different purpose.
And finally, one example with the verb to win:

I need to win this account.


Eu preciso ganhar esta conta.

In the last example, we have the verb to need followed by the


verb to win in the infinitive. The complement is this account. An
account in this context refers to a regular client of a company,
especially one that provides advertising services.
There is an expression used when someone is winning everything:
to run the table.

EXPRESSION

to run the table


ganhar todas

This expression comes from the world of sports, more specifically


billiards. This sports analogy refers to when a player sinks all the
balls that are on the table. Note that this expression is formed by
the verb to run.

< voltar para o índice


15
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

To run can also be used in a different context to convey another meaning:

Mrs. Jackson runs the company with an iron fist.


A senhora Jackson controla a empresa com um punho de ferro.

In this example, to run means to be in control. So, we can see that Mrs. Jackson
has control over the company. The expression we see next, with an iron fist,
means in a very strict way.
But constantly wanting to win them all can be a problem:

When you negotiate with your spouse, kids, relatives, friends, or even
co-workers, do you want your interest to prevail at any cost?
Quando você negocia com seu cônjuge, filhos, parentes, amigos ou mesmo
colegas de trabalho, você quer que seu interesse prevaleça a qualquer
custo?

Let’s analyze this sentence by starting with the nouns. Spouse, which we
have seen before, refers to a married person. Next, we have kids, which here
is the same as children. Co-workers means the same as workmates, that is,
colleagues.
In the question that follows, we have the verb to prevail, which means to get
control or influence. It is emphasized by the expression at any cost, which
means regardless of the risks and consequences.
Wanting to win at any cost goes against two objectives that must be taken into
account when negotiating:

OBJE CTIVES INVOLVED IN A NE GOTIATION

to achieve your interests to improve your relationships


alcançar seus interesses melhorar seus relacionamentos

The verb to achieve is similar to the verb to reach. The verb to improve means to
make something better, and it originates the noun improvement, which is formed
with the suffix -MENT. Speaking of prefixes, notice that the noun relationships is
formed with the suffix -SHIP, and it is plural in this sentence.

< voltar para o índice


16
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Even though improving the relationship is a goal involved in negotiations, here is


a common consequence:

We tend to take relationships for granted in negotiations.


Nós tendemos a tomar relacionamentos como garantidos nas negociações.

To take something or someone for granted means to fail to appreciate


something or someone properly, especially because we undervalue them. In other
words, it is to expect that someone or something will always be there when you
need them, but you never acknowledge how important or useful they really are.
The verb to take is commonly used in many expressions and phrasal verbs. Here
is another example:

We have to take care of our relationships.


Nós temos que tomar conta de nossos relacionamentos.

Take care is formed by the verb to take and the noun care. To take care of
means to look after something or someone, in this case, our relationships.
The verb to take can also be used by itself. Check it out:

She takes her son to school.


Ela leva o filho dela para a escola.

In the context of this sentence, to take means to move or to go with someone


from one place to another.

Now you know some nouns, adjectives and verbs


related to negotiation, some words formed with
suffixes, idiomatic expressions and expressions
frequently used in different contexts.

< voltar para o índice


17
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 3.

Activities
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.

( 1 ) acordo ( 8 ) pechinchar / ( ) suppliers ( ) workmate


negociar
( 2 ) acontecer / ocorrer ( ) seller ( ) fierce
( 9 ) comprador
( 3 ) partes opostas ( ) buyer ( ) protracted
( 10 ) longa / demorada/
( 4 ) fornecedores ( ) opposing parties ( ) job opening
prolongada
( 5 ) vaga de trabalho ( ) tough ( ) to bargain
( 11 ) dura / árdua
( 6 ) colega de trabalho ( ) to take place ( ) agreement
( 12 ) acirrada
( 7 ) vendedor

3. take place / happen / occur


B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words according to the translation.

Activity B – Answers
1. Mary and Josh in the job opening.

6. runs / controls
A Mary e o Josh estão interessados na vaga de trabalho. 1. are interested

5. take care
4. takes
2. lose

2. Every month we customers to cheaper rivals.


Todo mês perdemos clientes para rivais mais baratos.

3. The meetings every Thursday.


10. protracted

As reuniões ocorrem toda quinta-feira.


8. to bargain

11. tough
12. fierce
9. buyer
7. seller

4. She her son to school.


Ela leva o filho dela para a escola.
Activity A – Answers

3. opposing parties

5. We have to of our relationships.


2. to take place

5. job opening
1. agreement

6. workmate

Nós temos que tomar conta de nossos relacionamentos.


4. suppliers

6. Mrs. Jackson the company with an iron fist.


A senhora Jackson controla a empresa com um punho de ferro.

< voltar para o índice


18
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 4.

In the vocabulary part of this chapter, you learned words, verbs, and expressions used to talk
about negotiation. The first concept you saw was its definition. Take a look:

A negotiation agreement takes place whenever two or more people have different or
even opposing interests, and they need to reach an agreement.
Um acordo em uma negociação ocorre sempre que duas ou mais pessoas têm interesses
diferentes ou mesmo opostos, e precisam chegar a um acordo.

In the previous concept, we have three verbs, conjugated in the simple present by three
different subjects:

A negotiation agreement takes place…


Um acordo em uma negociação ocorre...

The first subject is a negotiation agreement, which is equivalent to the subject


pronoun it. So the verb is conjugated as takes, with -S added to the end.
After that, comes:

two or more people have different or even opposing interests…


duas ou mais pessoas têm interesses diferentes ou mesmo opostos...

Two or more people is the subject, which is equivalent to the subject pronoun
they. So, the verb to have is conjugated in the third person plural.
And finally:

they need to reach an agreement.


elas precisam chegar a um acordo.

< voltar para o índice


19
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

In this clause, they is referring to the people previously mentioned, followed by


the verb to need in the third personal plural, and the complement to reach an
agreement.
To understand the conjugation of verbs, it is important to know the subject
pronouns. Here they are:

SUBJE CT PRONOUNS

Singular Plural

1st I we
person eu nós

2nd you you


person você vocês

he/she
3rd ele/ela they
person eles/elas
it
ele/ela

The first person singular is I, which has the exclusive rule of always being
written with a capital letter, regardless of its position in the sentence. The second
person singular is you. As the third person singular, we have he, which is used
to talk about people who identify as male, she, which is used to talk about people
who identify as female, and it, which is gender-neutral and used to refer to
everything else, except people.
We is the first person plural. You is the second person plural, which is written
and pronounced in the same way as the singular, so you must always take the
context into account to understand to what it refers. Finally, they is the third
person plural, which is used to talk about people as well as animals and things,
regardless of gender.
The subject pronouns replace the noun that works as the subject of the
sentence.
In the simple present, the conjugation of the verb varies according to the subject.
With verbs other than to be, we have basically two conjugations. Take a look at
the first example:

< voltar para o índice


20
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

SIMPLE PRESENT – OTHER VERBS


Affirmative Form

subject + main verb in the base form + complement


sujeito + verbo principal na forma base + complemento

We lose customers to cheaper rivals.


Nós perdemos clientes para rivais mais baratos.

In this sentence, we have the structure subject + main verb in the base form +
complement. The subject of this example is a subject pronoun in the second person
plural, we, followed by the main verb lose, and the complement customers to
cheaper rivals. The conjugation of the main verb in the simple present is the same as
its base form, which is the verb without the particle to.
This same conjugation in the affirmative also works for other subjects. For instance:

SIMPLE PRESENT – OTHER VERBS


Affirmative Form

People tend to take relationships for granted in negotiations.


As pessoas tendem a tomar relacionamentos como garantidos nas negociações.

The subject is people, which is equivalent to the subject pronoun they, in the
third person plural, it is followed by the main verb tend in its base form, and the
complement to take relationships for granted in negotiations. Note that the
verb to take is in the infinitive because it is the complement of the main verb.
Here is another example:

SIMPLE PRESENT – OTHER VERBS


Affirmative Form

I need to win this account.


Eu preciso ganhar esta conta.

< voltar para o índice


21
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

The pronoun I is the subject, followed by the main verb need, which agrees with
the subject, and the complement is to win this account. Note that the verb to
win is in the infinitive because it is the complement of the main verb.
Check out another sentence:

SIMPLE PRESENT – OTHER VERBS


Affirmative Form

You win some, you lose some.


Às vezes se ganha, outras, se perde.

Here, we have two subjects and two verbs. In the first part, we have the subject you, and the
verb that follows, win, agrees with the subject. In the second part, again we have the subject
pronoun you, followed by the verb lose, which also agrees with the subject. Note that, for lack of
context, here you can be either singular or plural, but the verb is still conjugated the same way.
Note how the conjugations of the verbs for the first and second persons singular and plural, as
well as for the third person plural, are the same.
Now, look at the conjugation for the third person singular, that is, he, she and it:

SIMPLE PRESENT – OTHER VERBS


Affirmative Form

subject + main verb + complement


sujeito + verbo principal + complemento

He loses customers to cheaper rivals.


Ele perde clientes para rivais mais baratos.

The company loses customers to cheaper rivals.


A empresa perde clientes para rivais mais baratos.

In the first sentence, we have the subject pronoun in the third person singular, he, followed by the
verb lose with -S added to the end, and the complement customers to cheaper rivals.
In the second example, we have the subject the company, which is the third person singular it,
also followed by the verb lose conjugated in the same form as in the previous example, with -S
added to the end.
Despite this change in the conjugation of the main verb, notice that the sentences follow the
general structure of affirmative sentences in the simple present.

< voltar para o índice


22
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Verbs in the third person singular receive three different types of suffixes depending on their
spelling in the base form. Take a look at the spelling rules:

SPELLING RULES – THIRD PERSON PRESENT

GENERAL RULE = ADD -S


Regra geral = acrescente -S

Lucy buys from three different suppliers.


A Lucy compra de três fornecedores diferentes.

VERBS FINISHING IN -O, -S, -X, -CH, -SH AND -Z = ADD -ES
Verbos terminados em -O, -S, -X, -CH, -SH e -Z = acrescente -ES

Mary goes to school every day.


A Mary vai para a escola todos os dias.

VERBS FINISHING IN A CONSONANT + -Y = DROP -Y AND ADD -IES


Verbos terminados em consoante + -Y = retire o -Y e acrescente -IES

John carries his bag carefully.


O John carrega sua bolsa cuidadosamente.

In the first example, we have the verb to buy, so all we have to do is add -S. In
the second example, we have the verb to go, which ends in -O; therefore, you
have to add -ES to the end. The same thing happens to verbs ending in -S, -X,
-CH, -SH, and -Z. In the third example, we have the verb to carry, in which the -Y
is dropped and -IES is added to the end.
There is also an exception: the verb to have. Although it is a verb ending in -E, we
do not simply add -S to the end. Take a look:

SPELLING RULES – THIRD PERSON PRESENT


To Have

Mary has to go to work by bus.


A Mary tem que ir ao trabalho de ônibus.

< voltar para o índice


23
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

With the verb to have, we drop the -VE and add -S to the end, so the conjugation of the verb in
the third person singular becomes has.
Regardless of the conjugation of the verb, all the sentences you have seen so far are in the
affirmative form, and follow the same structure.
However, the negative form is slightly different. Take a look at the general structure:

SIMPLE PRESENT – OTHER VERBS


Negative Form

subject + auxiliary verb + not + main verb in the base form + complement
sujeito + verbo auxiliar + not + verbo principal na forma base + complemento

When we use verbs in the simple present in the negative form, we use the auxiliary
verb do, which will be conjugated. In other words, the main verb will remain in the
base form in all conjugations, and the auxiliary verb will be conjugated as does for
the third person singular, and do for the other conjugations.
For example:

SIMPLE PRESENT – OTHER VERBS


Negative Form

You do not / don’t want your interest to prevail at any cost.


Você não quer que seu interesse prevaleça a qualquer custo.

She does not / doesn’t want her interest to prevail at any cost.
Ela não quer que seu interesse prevaleça a qualquer custo.

In the first sentence, we have the subject in the second person singular, you,
followed by the auxiliary verb do, the main verb want in the base form, and the
complement your interest to prevail at any cost. In the second example, we have
the subject in the third person singular, she, followed by the auxiliary verb does, the
verb want in its base form, and the complement her interest to prevail at any cost.

< voltar para o índice


24
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

It is important to know that the auxiliary verb does not add any extra meaning to the
sentence. It is merely there to help structure the sentence.
There is also the contracted form of do not which is don’t, and does not, which is
doesn’t. Both can be used, but know that do not and does not will sound more
emphatic.
Do can also be an action verb, but only when it is the main verb of the sentence.
Check it out:

SIMPLE PRESENT – OTHER VERBS


To Do

I do my job.
Eu faço o meu trabalho.

I do not / don’t do my job.


Eu não faço o meu trabalho.

In the first previous example, we have a sentence in the simple present with the
subject I and the main verb do in its base form. Next, we have a negative sentence
with the same subject, I, and the same main verb do. Notice that, in the negative, you
can see do twice: first as an auxiliary verb – do not or don’t –, and then as the main
verb in the base form.
Now let’s see what the negative form of the simple present looks like with a subject
in the third person singular.

SIMPLE PRESENT – OTHER VERBS


Negative Form

subject + auxiliary verb + not + main verb in the base form + complement
sujeito + verbo auxiliar + not + verbo principal na forma base + complemento

As you can see, the general structure will be the same as that of other subjects. Have a look:

SIMPLE PRESENT – OTHER VERBS


Negative Form

This job opening does not interest me. Bret does not negotiate with the suppliers.
Esta vaga de trabalho não me interessa. O Bret não negocia com os fornecedores.

< voltar para o índice


25
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

In the first example, we have the subject this job opening, which corresponds
to the subject pronoun it. The auxiliary verb do must be conjugated in the third
person singular as does. The negative particle not and main verb interest in its
base form comes right afterward.
The same thing happens in the second example. The subject Bret is equivalent to
he, which is in the third person singular. The auxiliary verb do comes conjugated
as does, followed by the negative particle not and the main verb negotiate in its
base form.
Note that does is the auxiliary verb do conjugated in the third person singular.
And pay close attention to the main verb: you will not add -S to the end. The
main verb remains in the base form.
Remember, you can say does not or use the contracted form doesn’t. The non-
contracted form will sound more emphatic.
You will also use the auxiliary verb when forming interrogative sentences in the
simple present. Take a look at the general structure:

SIMPLE PRESENT – OTHER VERBS


Interrogative Form

auxiliary verb + subject + main verb in the base form + complement


verbo auxiliar + sujeito + verbo principal na forma base + complemento

As you can see, the auxiliary verb will be placed at the beginning of the sentence,
right before the subject. Here are some examples:

SIMPLE PRESENT – OTHER VERBS


Interrogative Form

Do you want your interest to prevail at any cost?


Você quer que seu interesse prevaleça a qualquer custo?

Do Mark and Zoey work here?


O Mark e a Zoey trabalham aqui?

< voltar para o índice


26
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

In the first example, we have the auxiliary verb do, followed by the
subject you, the main verb want in its base form, and the complement
your interests to prevail at any cost. In the second example, we have
the auxiliary verb do, followed by the subject Mark and Zoey, which
is equivalent to the subject pronoun they. Then there is the main verb
work in its base form and the complement here.
In the third person singular, the structure remains the same; however,
the auxiliary verb agrees with the subject.

SIMPLE PRESENT – OTHER VERBS


Interrogative Form

Does Andrew work here?


O Andrew trabalha aqui?

Does this job opening interest me?


Esta vaga de trabalho me interessa?

In the first previous example, we have the auxiliary verb do conjugated in the third person
singular as does, the subject Andrew, which corresponds to the subject pronoun he, the main
verb work in its base form, and the complement here. In the second sentence, we also have
the auxiliary verb conjugated as does, for the subject is this job opening, corresponding to it.
Interest is the main verb in the base form, and me is the complement.
In short, the rules for the simple present are as follows: in the affirmative, the main verb is
conjugated according to the subject. However, in the interrogative and negative, what is
conjugated is the auxiliary verb do, and the main verb remains in the base form.
Now let’s focus on the verb to be, since it does not follow the same logic as that of the others.
To be has three different conjugations in the simple present: am, are, and is. Take a look:

SIMPLE PRESENT – VERB TO BE

I am he is it is you are
eu sou/estou ele é/está ele é/está vocês são/estão
ela é/está

you are she is we are they are


você é/está ela é/está nós somos/estamos eles são/estão
elas são/estão

< voltar para o índice


27
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

The verb to be is used to build concepts, convey facts, and talk about states or conditions.
In the first person singular, I, the verb is conjugated as am. In the second person singular,
you, the verb is conjugated as are. In the third person singular, he, she and it, the verb is
conjugated as is. For all persons in the plural, we, you and they, the conjugation is are.
To form sentences in the simple present with the verb to be, we use the following structure:

SIMPLE PRESENT – VERB TO BE


Affirmative Form

subject + main verb + complement


sujeito + verbo principal + complemento

Notice that it is the same structure as the one used to form affirmative sentences with other verbs
in the simple present.
Have a look at some examples with to be in the affirmative:

SIMPLE PRESENT – VERB TO BE


Affirmative Form

I am / I’m a teacher. Michael is interested in Michelle.


Eu sou professor. O Michael está interessado na Michelle.

Michael and Jane are interested in the job opening.


O Michael e a Jane estão interessados na vaga de emprego.

In the first example, the subject is I, followed by the verb to be in the first person singular, am, and
the complement a teacher. Since the subject is a pronoun, you can contract it with the verb – I’m.
In the previous second example, we have the subject Michael, which is equivalent to the third
person singular he, followed by the verb to be conjugated as is, and the complement interested
in Michelle. The verb to be could be contracted had we used the subject pronoun he. It would be
he’s.
The previous third example has the subject Michael and Jane, which is the third person plural,
they, so the verb to be is conjugated as are. The complement is interested in the job opening. If
we used they instead of Michael and Jane, the verb to be could be contracted with the subject:
they’re.
In the interrogative and negative forms, the rules are a bit different from what you have seen so far.

< voltar para o índice


28
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

You will not use an auxiliary verb. In the negative, you just have to add not after
the main verb. Look:

SIMPLE PRESENT – VERB TO BE


Negative Form

subject + main verb + not + complement


sujeito + verbo principal + not + complemento

Bear in mind that the main verb has to agree with the subject. Take a look:

SIMPLE PRESENT – VERB TO BE


Negative Form

I am not / I’m not a teacher.


Eu não sou professor.

Michael and Jane are not / aren’t interested in the job opening.
O Michael e a Jane não estão interessados na vaga de emprego.

Michael is not / isn’t interested in Michelle.


O Michael não está interessado na Michelle.

Note that the contracted form is commonly used in the negative form. If the
subject is I, the contraction will remain between the pronoun and the verb: I’m
not. For the other pronouns, it will mostly happen between the main verb and the
particle not, as in aren’t and isn’t.
To form the interrogative with the verb to be, you need to invert the order of
the main verb and the subject. We do not use auxiliary verbs. Take a look at the
general sentence structure:

SIMPLE PRESENT – VERB TO BE


Interrogative Form

main verb + subject + complement


verbo principal + sujeito + complemento

The main verb will also have to be conjugated accordingly. Observe:

< voltar para o índice


29
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

SIMPLE PRESENT – VERB TO BE


Interrogative Form

Are Michael and Jane interested in the job opening?


O Michael e a Jane estão interessados na vaga de emprego?

Is Michael interested in Michelle?


O Michael está interessado na Michelle?

As you can see in the examples, the main verb agrees with and is placed right
before the subject.
It is not hard to tell that the verb to be is very different from the other verbs. It
is used in the formation of a very common expression: there be. It is used to
indicate the existence of something or someone, and it must agree with the noun
to which it refers. Take a look:

THERE BE
Affirmative Form

In every negotiation there are opposing objectives – other than that,


there is no need to negotiate.
Em toda negociação existem objetivos opostos – do contrário, não há
necessidade de se negociar.

There are is the expression there be conjugated in the plural. This is because
it refers to opposing objectives, which is plural. In the same example, we have
there be referring to the existence of another element in the sentence, no need,
which is singular, so the expression is conjugated as there is. As you can see,
there be is in the affirmative form here.
Now, take a look at there be in the negative form:

THERE BE
Negative Form

Singular
there is not / there isn’t + singular noun
não tem / não há / não existe + substantivo no singular

< voltar para o índice


30
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Plural
there are not / there aren’t + plural noun
não têm / não há / não existem + substantivo no plural

To form the negative structure with there be, just add not after the conjugated
verb according to the element to which it refers. In the singular, this conjugation is
there is not, which can be contracted as there isn't. In the plural, the conjugation
is there are not, which can be contracted as there aren’t.
Now, here is the interrogative form:

THERE BE
Interrogative Form

Singular
is there + singular noun
tem / há / existe + substantivo no singular

Plural
are there + plural noun
têm / há / existem + substantivo no plural

In the interrogative, we invert the order of there and be. The verb to be comes
first, then there and the noun to which it refers. Again, the verb agrees with
the noun, and the structure becomes are there in the plural and is there in the
singular.

In this chapter, you’ve learned about the


simple present of the verb to be and other
verbs. You’ve also learned about subject
pronouns, as well as how to talk about GRAMMAR GUIDE
existence using there be. If you want to
learn more about these topics, you can refer Simple Present – Other Verbs Page 254
to the Grammar Guide section at the end of Simple Present – Verb To Be Page 260
your book. Spelling Rules – Third Person Present Page 264
Subject Pronouns Page 266
There + To Be Page 276

< voltar para o índice


31
Chapter 1 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 5.

Activities
A. Complete the table with the correct form of the verb to be.

Affirmative Negative Interrogative


I am I am not / I’m not (1)
You are (2) Are you...?
(3) He is not / He isn’t Is he...?
She is / She’s (4) Is she...?
It is / It’s It is not / It isn’t (5)
(6) We are not / We aren’t Are we...?
You are / You’re (7) Are you...?
They are / They’re They are not / They aren’t (8)

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words according to the translation.

1. your interest to prevail at any cost?


Você quer que seu interesse prevaleça a qualquer custo? 5. does not negotiate / doesn’t

2. customers to cheaper rivals.


3. I don’t do / I do not do

Ele perde clientes para rivais mais baratos.


Activity B – Answers

4. I need / I have

6. Do they work
1. Do you want

3. my job.
negotiate
2. He loses

Eu não faço o meu trabalho.

4. to win this account.


Eu preciso ganhar esta conta.
2. You are not / You aren’t

7. You are not / You aren’t


4. She is not / She isn’t

5. Bret with the suppliers.


Activity A – Answers

O Bret não negocia com os fornecedores.


6. We are / We’re
3. He is / He’s

8. Are they?
1. Am I?

6. here?
5. Is it?

Eles trabalham aqui?

< voltar para o índice


32
2
Lose-Lose
The Lose-Lose
Outcome
Outcome
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 1.

In this chapter, you will learn how to use superlatives and how to express
probability. You will also take a further look into idiomatic expressions.
Now, look at the script of The Lose-Lose Outcome.

THE LOSE-LOSE OUTCOME

Think for a second.

Can you imagine how many possible outcomes can emerge when you
have a group of people with different objectives trying to reach an
agreement?

I bet you did not paint a pretty picture in your mind. And I don’t blame
you.

Things may very well go south.

And I’ll tell you what, this is probably one of the easiest outcomes to be
reached when you gather a group of people with little or no reflection at
all on what a negotiation is made of.

As you saw in the last episode, there are two major aspects for every
negotiation to happen: two or more people with different objectives who
have a relationship of any kind. These are the two aspects negotiators
should always keep in mind and give equal importance to.

Problems start to arise when they are unbalanced.

If they either cherish the relationship they currently have with the other
person so much to the point that they fail to pay attention to their
objectives, or if it is the other way around, that is, if they completely
disregard the relationship and focus merely on their objectives, a lose-
lose outcome is bound to happen.

Let me paint a picture for you:

< voltar para o índice


34
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

A person has worked at the same company for some years and has
developed a relationship with her teammates and leaders. This person
has been offered another position in another company she would really
love to take. But she misses the chance because she doesn’t quit her
job. As a matter of fact, she doesn’t even approach the subject with her
boss and colleagues.

It’s not uncommon for us to stall to approach delicate subjects or to


just put up with certain attitudes and behaviors we should not just
because we want to avoid conflict. We are afraid that, if we approach
the subject, we might end up facing emotional distress and eventually
jeopardizing the relationship. This is the worst mistake we can make: fail
to negotiate.

In short, by overestimating the relationship you already have, you miss


the chance to achieve your goals and to improve the relationship.

But there is still another situation that can lead you to a lose-lose
outcome. Disregarding that you should cherish the relationship. When
all parties in a negotiation only care about achieving their personal goals,
and only have their own interests and no one else’s in mind, the most
likely outcome is that there will be no agreement whatsoever.

Turns out no one achieves any goals, and the relationship has probably
worsened after the negotiation.

Lose-lose outcomes might happen even with experienced negotiators.


We are all human, and it’s not hard to get carried away by emotions.
Learning the course that takes us to the easiest, yet least desirable,
outcome for negotiation will certainly help us recognize and avoid it.

A NE GOCIAÇÃO PE RDE-PERDE

Pense por um segundo.

Você pode imaginar quantas negociações possíveis podem surgir


quando você tem um grupo de pessoas com objetivos diferentes
tentando chegar a um acordo?

< voltar para o índice


35
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Aposto que você não imaginou uma cena bonita. E eu não culpo você.

As coisas podem muito bem dar errado.

E vou dizer uma coisa, este é provavelmente um dos resultados mais


fáceis de alcançar quando você reúne um grupo de pessoas com pouca
ou nenhuma reflexão sobre como uma negociação é feita.

Como você viu no último episódio, há dois aspectos importantes para


cada negociação acontecer: duas ou mais pessoas com objetivos
diferentes que têm um relacionamento de qualquer tipo. E estes são os
dois aspectos que os negociadores sempre devem ter em mente e dar
igual importância.

Os problemas começam a surgir quando eles estão desequilibrados.

Se eles valorizam tanto o relacionamento que têm com a outra pessoa


a ponto de não prestar atenção aos seus objetivos, ou se for o contrário,
isto é, se eles desconsiderarem completamente o relacionamento e se
concentrarem meramente em seus objetivos, uma negociação perde-
perde é inevitável.

Imagine esta situação:

Uma pessoa trabalha na mesma empresa há alguns anos e construiu


um relacionamento com seus colegas de equipe e líderes. Essa pessoa
recebeu uma oferta de emprego em outra empresa que ela gostaria muito
de aceitar. Mas ela perde a chance porque não deixou o emprego. Na
verdade, ela nem sequer abordou o assunto com seu chefe e colegas.

Não é incomum que enrolemos para abordar assuntos delicados ou


que simplesmente toleremos certas atitudes e comportamentos que
não deveríamos apenas porque queremos evitar conflitos. Temos medo
de que, se abordarmos o assunto, possamos acabar enfrentando um
desconforto emocional e, por fim, colocar o relacionamento em risco.
Este é o pior erro que podemos cometer: deixar de negociar.

Resumindo, ao superestimar o relacionamento que você já tem,


você perde a chance de atingir seus objetivos e de melhorar o
relacionamento.

Mas ainda há outra situação que pode levar você a uma negociação
perde-perde: desconsiderar que você deve valorizar o relacionamento.
Quando todos envolvidos em uma negociação só se preocupam em

< voltar para o índice


36
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

alcançar os seus objetivos pessoais, e só têm seus próprios interesses


em mente sem considerar os dos outros, o resultado mais provável é
que não haja qualquer acordo.

Como resultado, ninguém atinge nenhum objetivo e o relacionamento


provavelmente vai ficar pior após a negociação.

Negociações perde-perde podem acontecer até com negociadores


experientes. Somos todos humanos, e não é difícil se deixar levar
pelas emoções. Aprender o rumo que nos leva ao resultado mais fácil,
porém menos desejável, para a negociação certamente nos ajudará a
reconhecê-lo e evitá-lo.

< voltar para o índice


37
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 2.

Negotiation comes into play when we have two or more people with different or even opposite
interests, and they need to come to an agreement. However, differences can be complicated to
navigate, and tensions can arise. When thinking about negotiation, most people do not imagine
positive things.
In other words:

When you thought about negotiation, I bet you did not paint a pretty picture in your
mind. And I don’t blame you. Things may very well go south.
Quando você pensou em negociação, eu aposto que você não imaginou uma cena bonita.
E eu não culpo você. As coisas podem muito bem dar errado.

These sentences contain interesting expressions. Take a look:

EXPRESSIONS

I bet I don’t blame you


eu aposto eu não te culpo / eu te entendo

to paint a pretty picture to go south


imaginar uma cena bonita dar errado

Most of the aforementioned verbs, except for to blame, should be taken literally; two of them
are part of expressions (to paint and to go), and one is being used figuratively (to bet). In the
sentence in the example, the verb to bet does not refer to a wager, it is not about gambling; it
just expresses how confident you are of something.

< voltar para o índice


38
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

The expression to paint a pretty picture is followed by in your mind. The noun
mind refers to the part of a person that makes it possible for them to think, feel
emotions, and understand things.
The word mind can also be a verb, to mind. For example:

I don’t mind working today.


Eu não me importo de trabalhar hoje.

Here, to mind means to care about something to the point of being bothered by
it. When to mind is followed by another verb, the verb must be in the -ING form.
The verb to mind is also used in another expression:

Mind your own business!


Cuide da sua vida!

Note that this sentence is quite emphatic and can sound somehow aggressive. In
this expression, the word business means one’s affairs and concerns.
There are several words in the English language that can be either verbs or
nouns, such as blame. As a noun, it refers to the responsibility for a bad situation.
For example:

She always gets the blame for his mistakes.


Ela sempre leva a culpa pelos erros dele.

To get the blame means to be held responsible for a mistake or something bad,
whether it is true or not.

VERBS

to get the blame


levar a culpa

to be held responsible
ser responsabilizado(a)

< voltar para o índice


39
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

When owning up to a mistake, we can use the word fault. Observe:

It’s my fault.
It’s my blame.
É culpa minha.

Here, the noun fault refers to the actual responsibility for having done something bad. It is
different from blame, a noun that means an alleged responsibility for having done something
bad. We cannot say “it is my blame”, we use the word fault instead.
Now let’s take a closer look at word formation. The word blame can be either a verb or a noun.
But some words, such as adverbs, will be formed differently.
The adverb probably, for example, is formed from the adjective probable and the suffix -LY.
This adverb means there is a probability that something will happen or not, depending on
whether the sentence is affirmative or negative. Another adverb that indicates probability and is
formed from an adjective and the suffix -LY is presumably.
But not all adverbs are formed from adjectives, and not all adverbs are formed with the suffix
-LY. It is the case of maybe. This adverb does not originate from an adjective and is not formed
with the suffix -LY, but it also refers to the probability of something happening or not.
Here is a list of adverbs that convey probability:

ADVERBS

probably presumably maybe


provavelmente presumidamente talvez

Look at these adverbs in sentences:

Things will probably go south.


As coisas provavelmente vão dar errado.

Things will presumably go south.


As coisas presumidamente darão errado.

Maybe things will go south.


Talvez as coisas deem errado.

< voltar para o índice


40
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

As you can see, the adverb maybe


is usually placed at the beginning of
the sentence, while probably and
presumably are often placed before
the main verb.
Besides using adverbs, we can also
express probability with an adjective: ADJE CTIVE

likely
provável

Observe an example:

Things are likely to go south.


É provável que as coisas deem errado.

This adjective is commonly used with the verb to be followed by a verb in the
infinitive form. In other words, to be likely to + verb. However, the verb to be
will be conjugated according to the subject.
And speaking of verbs, some modal verbs are used to talk about probability, such
as may and might. Look:

MODAL VERBS

may might
poder ( possibilidade) poder ( possibilidade remota)

Look at may and might used in sentences:

Things may very well go south.


As coisas podem muito bem dar errado.

Lose-lose outcomes might happen even with experienced negotiators.


Resultados perde-perde podem acontecer até com negociadores experientes.

< voltar para o índice


41
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

The verb may conveys a sense of probability to the expression to go south. It


means there is a chance that this will happen. Might conveys a sense of remote
possibility to the verb to happen. It implies a lower probability than may.
In the second previous example, we have the expression lose-lose. It refers to
a situation in which everybody loses. The opposite of to lose is to win. There
is another expression, win-win, which refers to the opposite situation, in which
everybody wins. Take a look:

This is a win-win situation.


Esta é uma situação ganha-ganha.

So far, you have seen several examples of words to speak of some degree of
probability.
However, some adverbs express a high level of certainty, such as:

ADVERB S

surely definitely positively/certainly


seguramente definitivamente positivamente/certamente

These adverbs stem from an adjective + the suffix -LY: sure + -LY for surely;
definite + -LY for definitely; positive + -LY for positively, and certain + -LY for
certainly.
Now observe them being used in sentences.

Learning the course that takes us to the easiest, yet least desirable,
outcome for a negotiation will certainly help us recognize and avoid it.
Aprender o rumo que nos leva ao resultado mais fácil, porém menos
desejável, para a negociação certamente nos ajudará a reconhecê-lo e
evitá-lo.

< voltar para o índice


42
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Certainly refers to the verb to help, giving it a sense of high certainty. It could be
replaced by surely or positively and maintain the same sense of high certainty. This
sense of certainty is reinforced by the modal verb will. There are two superlative
adjectives in this sentence: easiest and least desirable. Superlatives are adjectives
that express the highest degree of a particular quality. These adjectives refer to the
outcomes, a plural noun that means results. The previous example means that even
very experienced negotiators may be tempted to choose the easy way out.

And here is one of the consequences that may take place on such occasions:

If people completely disregard the relationship and focus merely on their


objectives, a lose-lose outcome is bound to happen.
Se as pessoas desconsiderarem completamente o relacionamento e se
concentrarem meramente em seus objetivos, é bem provável que um resultado
perde-perde aconteça.

This sentence states that a lose-lose outcome is bound to happen. Bound is


an adjective that forms the expression to be bound + to + verb, which means
something is very likely to happen. This is yet another way to talk about
probability with an adjective. Bound can have different meanings according to
the context, which is common in the English language.
Moreover, there are two adverbs in this sentence, both formed by an adjective
and the suffix -LY: completely, which has the same meaning as totally or
entirely. The other adverb is merely, and it means only, simply, nothing more. It
could be replaced by just.
Observe the following list:

ADVERBS

totally merely just


totalmente meramente apenas

completely entirely
completamente inteiramente

< voltar para o índice


43
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

As previously seen, the word just can be an adverb synonymous with merely, as in the
following sentence:

It’s not uncommon for us to stall to approach delicate subjects or to just put up with
certain attitudes and behaviors we should not just because we want to avoid conflict.
Não é incomum que enrolemos para abordar assuntos delicados ou que simplesmente
toleremos certas atitudes e comportamentos que não deveríamos apenas porque
queremos evitar conflitos.

The previous sentence brings interesting verbs, such as to stall, which means to deliberately
delay something or someone. Here, the verb to approach means to tackle, to deal with
something. The phrasal verb to put up with means to tolerate. The verb to want means to
desire or to have a desire for something, and to avoid means to prevent.
There is a modal verb in this sentence: should. In the example, it is used to say what is the
correct or best thing to do.
The adverb just is a synonym for merely, but this word can have different meanings in different
contexts. For example:

You should approach just one topic at a time in a negotiation.


Você deve abordar apenas um tópico por vez numa negociação.

In this sentence, just means nothing more than the amount of topics that is
mentioned in the sentence, which is one. In this case, just is a synonym for only,
another adverb.
But it can still have a third meaning.

A cup of coffee is just what I need.


Uma xícara de café é exatamente o que eu preciso.

In the previous sentence, just is the same as exactly.


Just is not the only case of a word with multiple uses. The words still and yet can
also be applied in different contexts.
Observe these words in sentences:

It’s still dark outside. It’s not dark outside yet.


Ainda está escuro lá fora. Ainda não está escuro lá fora.

< voltar para o índice


44
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Still, an adverb, conveys the idea that things remain the same as before, the idea is that of
continuity. Note that it is being used in an affirmative sentence.
Yet is being used in a negative sentence; it refers to something that has not happened until this
moment.
When conveying this idea of continuity, still is used in affirmative sentences, and yet, in
negative sentences, as we’ve just seen. However, they can also be used for emphasis. Observe:

There is still another situation that can lead you to a lose-lose outcome.
Tem mais uma situação que pode levar você a um resultado perde-perde.

There is yet another situation that can lead you to a lose-lose outcome.
Tem mais uma situação que pode levar você a um resultado perde-perde.

In the previous sentences, still and yet refer to another, which means one more, an additional
one. When used as such, still and yet mean also, in addition; in this case, they mean that there
is one more thing in addition to other things that have already been mentioned.
The adverb already can be used to talk about a period before now, before a particular time. For
example:

By overestimating the relationship you already have, you miss the chance to achieve
your goals and to improve the relationship.
Ao superestimar o relacionamento que você já tem, você perde a chance de atingir seus
objetivos e de melhorar o relacionamento.

Already is a word used to say that something is true before this moment in time.
Notice that the verb to miss refers to the noun chance. It means to fail to do
something, in this case, to fail to take a chance.

Now you know how to talk about certainty, doubt,


and probability using adverbs, adjectives, and
some idiomatic expressions.

< voltar para o índice


45
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 3.

Activities
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.

( 1 ) imaginar uma ( 7 ) desconsiderar ( ) to bet ( ) to blame


cena bonita
( 8 ) seguramente ( ) to disregard ( ) probably
( 2 ) dar errado
( 9 ) presumidamente ( ) to paint a pretty ( ) to get the blame
( 3 ) culpar picture
( 10 ) talvez ( ) maybe
( 4 ) apostar ( ) presumably
( 11 ) provável ( ) surely
( 5 ) levar a culpa ( ) to put up with
( 12 ) provavelmente ( ) to go south
( 6 ) tolerar ( ) likely

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words according to the translation:

Activity B – Answers
1. It’s my .
É minha culpa.

5. don’t mind
2. blame
3. blame

6. Mind
1. fault

4. bet
2. She always takes the for his mistakes.
Ela sempre leva a culpa pelos erros dele.

3. I don’t you.
6. to put up with
7. to disregard

9. presumably

Eu não culpo você.


12. probably
10. maybe
11. likely
8. surely

4. I you did not paint a pretty picture in your mind.


Eu aposto que você não imaginou uma cena bonita.
Activity A – Answers

5. to get the blame


1. to paint a pretty

5. I working today.
2. to go south

Eu não me importo de trabalhar hoje.


3. to blame
picture

4. to bet

6. your own business!


Cuide da sua vida!

< voltar para o índice


46
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 4.

Modal verbs are not the only words that can indicate probability; adverbs can also be
used to that intent.
In the vocabulary part of this chapter, you’ve learned that there are verbs that convey a
specific meaning to the sentences in which they are used.
Take a look:

may = probability should = expectation or recommendation


probabilidade expectativa ou recomendação

might = remote probability will = certainty, inevitability or future action


probabilidade remota certeza, inevitabilidade, ou ação futura

They are called modal verbs, and regardless of their meaning, they all follow the
same basic structure. Observe:

MODAL VERBS – BASIC STRUCTURE


Affirmative Form

subject + modal verb + main verb in the base form + complement


sujeito + verbo modal + verbo principal na forma base + complemento

The main verb is not the modal verb, so modal verbs work as auxiliary verbs. It is
also worth remembering that the base form is the infinitive without the particle
to.

< voltar para o índice


47
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

This is the general structure for all modal verbs in the affirmative form, no matter
the subject. And each modal will add a specific idea to the main verb, according
to the context.
As seen previously, one of the ideas that may conveys is that of probability. Take
a look:

MODAL VERB MAY – PROBABILIT Y


Affirmative Form

Things may go south.


As coisas podem dar errado.

The subject of the sentence is the plural noun things. Then, we have the
modal verb may followed by the main verb to go in its base form. South is the
complement. Thus, this sentence follows the structure of the affirmative form,
subject + modal verb + main verb in the base form + complement.
The modal verb may can also be used in the negative form to talk about the
probability of something not happening. Observe:

MODAL VERB MAY – PROBABILIT Y


Negative Form

She may not get the blame for his mistakes.


Ela pode não levar a culpa pelos erros dele.

The subject is the subject pronoun she, then we have the modal verb may, followed
by not, and the main verb to take in its base form. The rest of the sentence is the
complement. There is a new element to the sentence: not. It marks the negative form
of sentences with modal verbs.
Observe:

MODAL VERBS – BASIC STRUCTURE


Negative Form

subject + modal verb + not + main verb in the base form + complement
sujeito + verbo modal + not + verbo principal na forma base + complemento

< voltar para o índice


48
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

When used in the negative form, all modal verbs will follow the same structure, such as may
and might.
There is a subtle difference between may and might. They are both used to talk about
probability, but might refers to a remote one. Look at this sentence:

MODAL VERB MIGHT – REMOTE PROBABILIT Y

Lose-lose outcomes might happen even with experienced negotiators.


É possível que resultados perde-perde aconteçam até com negociadores experientes.
Há uma pequena chance de resultados perde-perde acontecerem até com negociadores
experientes.

She might not be hired.


Há uma pequena chance de que ela não seja contratada.
É pouco provável que ela seja contratada.

Might can be used both in affirmative and negative sentences. This modal verb
will follow the basic structure for modal verbs in the affirmative and negative
forms.
May and might are used to talk about different levels of probability, but there is
a modal verb to talk about expectations: should. This modal verb is also used to
make recommendations.
Look at this example:

MODAL VERB SHOULD – RE COMMENDATION


Affirmative Form

Negotiators should keep these two aspects in mind.


Os negociadores devem ter em mente esses dois aspectos.

This sentence follows the basic structure of the affirmative form for modal
verbs. The subject is negotiators, should is the modal verb which indicates a
recommendation, keep is the base form of the main verb to keep, and the rest of
the sentence is the complement.

< voltar para o índice


49
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Modal verbs and their meanings depend a great deal on the context of the sentence.
Sometimes that difference is more evident, other times, not so much.
Let’s take a look at another example with should, but this time in the negative form:

MODAL VERB SHOULD – RE COMMENDATION


Negative Form

We should not put up with certain attitudes and behaviors just to avoid conflicts.
Nós não devemos tolerar certas atitudes e comportamentos só para evitar conflitos.

Should not is a recommendation of something which is not to be done.


Now let’s see how to express an expectation with this verb:

MODAL VERB SHOULD – EXPE CTATION


Affirmative Form

Tomorrow should be a nice day.


Amanhã deve ser um dia agradável.

This sentence refers to an expectation for something in the future.


There is yet another modal verb, but it is used to talk about certainty: will. This
modal verb is commonly used to refer to future actions, following the same structure
as the modal verbs you have seen so far. It usually sounds like an inevitable
situation.
Take a look at this sentence:

MODAL VERB WILL – FUTURE ACTIONS


Affirmative Form

Learning the course that takes us to the easiest, yet least desirable,
outcome for a negotiation will certainly help us recognize and avoid it.
Aprender o rumo que nos leva ao resultado mais fácil, porém menos desejável,
para a negociação certamente nos ajudará a reconhecê-lo e evitá-lo.

< voltar para o índice


50
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

The sentence above refers to something that will inevitably happen. This is emphasized by the
adverb certainly.
Like other modal verbs, will can be used in the negative form. Observe:

MODAL VERB WILL – FUTURE ACTIONS


Negative Form

If people completely disregard the relationship and focus merely on their objectives,
the outcome of the negotiation will not be positive.
Se as pessoas desconsiderarem completamente o relacionamento e se concentrarem
unicamente em seus objetivos, o resultado da negociação não vai ser positivo.

The previous sentence is in the negative form, so it conveys a situation that will
not happen in the future.
As with several verbs in English, will not has a contracted form that can also be
used: won’t. Remember that the contracted form is less emphatic.
Depending on the situation, will not or won’t may convey an idea of refusal.
For example:

MODAL VERB WILL – REFUSAL


Negative Form

Megan is late for work, but her car won’t start.


A Megan está atrasada para o trabalho, mas o carro dela não liga.

In the previous sentence, won’t start means the car is not working properly. It
conveys a refusal to function.
Will can also be used to question whether or not something will happen in the
future, in an interrogative sentence.
Observe the basic structure of the interrogative form for modal verbs:

MODAL VERBS – BASIC STRUCTURE


Interrogative form

modal verb + subject + main verb in the base form + complement


verbo modal + sujeito + verbo principal na forma base + complemento

< voltar para o índice


51
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

So, in questions with will, the modal verb is the first element of the sentence.
Observe the example:

MODAL VERB WILL – FUTURE


Interrogative Form

Will you call Fred and close the deal?


Você vai ligar para o Fred e fechar o negócio?

The first element of the previous sentence is the modal verb will, followed by the subject – you
–, the main verb in its base form – call –, and the rest of the sentence is the complement, thus
following the basic structure of the interrogative form. Notice that the example is a question to
know if something will happen in the future.
Now, look at another example:

MODAL VERB WILL – PROPOSAL


Interrogative Form

Will you marry me?


Você casa comigo?

The modal verb will is at the beginning of the sentence, followed by the subject you, the main
verb in its base form, marry, and me is the complement. Although the sentence is also in the
interrogative form, this is a proposal, not a question to know if something will happen in the future.
Will can also express a relationship of cause and consequence, as it is used to form conditional
sentences.

Conditionals are used to talk about hypothetical situations and their


consequences. They are formed by a sentence that introduces a hypothetical
situation initiated by if, which is called if-clause, and another sentence that
presents the consequence, which is called main clause.
The zero conditional establishes a relationship of cause and consequence over
facts or predictable situations, that is, something that would hardly change.
Take a look:

< voltar para o índice


52
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

ZERO CONDIT IONAL

If people completely disregard the relationship, a lose-lose outcome is


bound to happen.
Se as pessoas desconsiderarem completamente o relacionamento, um
resultado perde-perde está fadado a acontecer.

The sentence begins with if, setting a hypothetical situation. This is the if-clause,
and, in the zero conditional, it will be in the simple present. The verb of the if-
clause is disregard, which agrees with the subject, people, in the third person
plural. After the comma, we have the consequence, presented in what we call the
main clause, which is also in the simple present.
Observe the basic structure of the zero conditional:

ZERO CONDITIONAL

If-clause Main clause


simple present simple present

Conditionals present a relationship of cause and effect: in order for something to occur, a previous
thing must happen. The zero conditional refers to something that is a general truth, a generally
accepted fact, such as:

ZERO CONDITIONAL

If you heat water, it boils.


Se você aquece a água, ela ferve.

As you can see, both verbs are in the simple present, and the sentence presents a situation that is
a general truth, and that will always have the same result.
The if-clause and the main clause can be inverted without losing their meaning. For example:

ZERO CONDITIONAL

A lose-lose outcome is bound to happen if people completely disregard the relationship.


Um resultado perde-perde está fadado a acontecer se as pessoas desconsiderarem
completamente o relacionamento.

< voltar para o índice


53
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

The main clause is presented first, and the comma is no longer used: what links both clauses is
the conjunction if. However, the idea is the same as that of the sentence we’ve seen before, and
both verbs remain in the simple present.
Another type of cause-and-consequence relationship is one that is likely to happen at some
point in the future. We call this the first conditional. In this case, the if-clause is in the simple
present, and the main clause, which presents the consequence, is formed with a modal verb.
For example:

FIRST CONDITIONAL

If people put their own interests first, the negotiation will be compromised.
Se as pessoas colocarem seus próprios interesses em primeiro lugar, a negociação ficará
comprometida.

Once more the sentence begins with the conjunction if, thus establishing a
hypothetical situation. The main verb is in the simple present: put. After the
comma, comes the main clause, and it is not in the simple present, it is formed
with the modal verb will, indicating that there is a level of inevitability to the
consequence.
This sentence in the first conditional establishes a cause or a condition set in the
present, and the consequence will happen sometime in the future. Observe the
general structure:

FIRST CONDITIONAL

If-clause Main clause


simple present modal verb + main verb in the base form
simple present verbo modal + verbo principal na forma base

Observe another example:

FIRST CONDITIONAL

If all parties in a negotiation only care about their personal goals, there
will be no agreement whatsoever.
Em uma negociação, se todas as partes se importarem apenas com os
seus objetivos pessoais, não vai haver nenhum tipo de acordo.

< voltar para o índice


54
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

The if-clause is once more in the simple present, as evidenced by the verb care,
which agrees with the subject all parties, in the third person plural. The consequence
that happens at some point in the future is presented by the modal verb will.
As with the zero conditional, it is possible to invert the clauses here as well.
Observe:

FIRST CONDITIONAL

There will be no agreement whatsoever if all parties in a negotiation


only care about their personal goals.
Não vai haver nenhum tipo de acordo em uma negociação se todas as
partes se importarem apenas com os seus objetivos pessoais.

The main clause is now at the beginning of the sentence, and the consequence
will happen in the future, as evidenced by the use of the modal verb will
alongside the main verb to be. The conjunction if links the main clause to the
if-clause. The if-clause is set in the simple present, and the verb care agrees with
the subject their personal goals, in the third person plural.
The first conditional can be formed with other modal verbs, such as may and
should. The structure will remain the same: the if-clause will be in the simple
present, and the main clause will be formed using a modal verb. The idea of the
sentence, however, will change according to what each modal verb conveys.
For example:

FIRST CONDITIONAL

If people put their own interests first, the negotiation may be


compromised.
Se as pessoas colocarem seus próprios interesses em primeiro lugar, a
negociação pode ficar comprometida.

The sentence begins with the conjunction if, so the if-clause is at the beginning
in this case. The main verb is in the simple present: put. The main clause is after
the comma, but it is formed with the modal verb may, which conveys an idea
of probability. So, the consequence expressed with may will be less certain
compared to the one expressed with will.
Observe another example:

< voltar para o índice


55
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

FIRST CONDITIONAL

If people put their own interests first, the negotiation should be compromised.
Se as pessoas colocarem seus próprios interesses em primeiro lugar, a negociação
deve ficar comprometida.

The if-clause is the same as previously seen, but the main clause is now formed with the
modal verb should. It no longer refers to the probability of something happening, but to
the expectation or supposition that something will happen.

In this chapter, you’ve learned how to use some modal verbs. You have
also learned a little more about the future and different ways to talk
about probability. If you want to learn more about these topics, you
can refer to the Grammar Guide section at the end of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Conditionals Page 191


Modal Verb May Page 209
Modal Verb Might Page 212
Modal Verb Should Page 214
Will Page 280

< voltar para o índice


56
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 5.

Activities
A. Change the sentences into the affirmative, negative, or interrogative forms:

1. Tomorrow should be a nice day.


( negative)

2. Things may go south.


( negative)

3. She might not be hired.


(affirmative)

4. Negotiators should keep these two aspects in mind.


( negative)

5. Lose-lose outcomes might happen even with experienced negotiators.


( negative)

6. The negotiation will be compromised.


(interrogative)

7. She may not get the blame for his mistakes.


(affirmative)

8. We should put up with certain attitudes and behaviors just to avoid conflicts.
( negative)

< voltar para o índice


57
Chapter 2 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words according to the translation.

1. If people put their own interests first, the negotiation compromised.


Se as pessoas colocarem seus próprios interesses em primeiro lugar, a negociação pode ficar
comprometida.

2. If people put their own interests first, the negotiation compromised.


Se as pessoas colocarem seus próprios interesses em primeiro lugar, a negociação ficará comprometida.

3. If people completely disregard the relationship, a lose-lose outcome to


happen.
Se as pessoas desconsiderarem completamente o relacionamento, um resultado perde-perde está
fadado a acontecer.

4. If all parties in a negotiation only care about their personal goals, an


agreement whatsoever.
Em uma negociação, se todas as partes só se importarem com os seus objetivos pessoais, não vai
haver nenhum tipo de acordo.

5. If people completely disregard the relationship and focus merely on their objectives, the outcome of
the negotiation positive.
Se as pessoas desconsiderarem completamente o relacionamento e se concentrarem unicamente em
seus objetivos, o resultado da negociação não vai ser positivo.

6. If people put their own interests first, the negotiation compromised.


Se as pessoas colocarem seus próprios interesses em primeiro lugar, a negociação deve ficar
comprometida.

8. We should not put up with certain attitudes and behaviors just to avoid conflicts.
7. She may get the blame for his mistakes.
6. should be 6. Will the negotiation be compromised?
5. will not be / won’t be 5. Lose-lose outcomes might not happen even with experienced negotiators.
4. there will not be / there won’t be 4. Negotiators should not keep these two aspects in mind.
3. is bound 3. She might be hired.
2. will be 2. Things may not go south.
1. may be / might be 1. Tomorrow should not be a nice day.
Activity B – Answers Activity A – Answers

< voltar para o índice


58
3
The win-lose
The Win-Lose
outcome
Outcome
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 1.

In this chapter, you will learn how to emphasize ideas in the speech and how
to express opposing, different, or alternative ideas. You will also see some
important vocabulary and grammar topics to expand your competencies in the
English language.
Now, look at the script of The Win-Lose Outcome.

THE WIN-LOSE OUTCOME

For someone to win, somebody else has to lose.

You’ve probably heard this statement before, or even uttered it yourself.


Win-lose is perhaps the first outcome that pops into most people’s
minds when they think about negotiation: a competition between two
opposing parties.

But who’s to blame? Competition is everywhere. We are raised


watching win-lose sports competitions. We compete with other
applicants for a job position. We vote for people who are going to
represent us—elections are a competition. And, if we think about it, even
in the legal system, two opposing parties advocate for their interests,
and only one prevails.

In such a competitive world, it’s only natural that we set up our minds to
compete, even with those we cherish the most. Team members compete
among themselves, classmates compete on who gets the highest grade,
and even siblings compete over their parents’ attention, when, in fact, all
of them should only have one thing in mind: collaboration.

But how did we get into this mess? Let’s try to work this through.

We’ve learned that when both parties in a negotiation overestimate


the relationship at the expense of their objectives, or when both
parties underestimate the relationship and can only think of their own
interests, the most likely outcome is that none of them will achieve their
objectives, and they miss the chance to improve the relationship; in fact,
they may even worsen it. In other words, it’ll probably come to a lose-
lose outcome.

< voltar para o índice


60
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

That happens when the two main aspects of a negotiation—interests


and relationship—are unbalanced.

In a win-lose outcome, these aspects are also unbalanced. But instead


of both parties underestimating the relationship or their objectives, what
we see here is that one party overestimates the relationship, whereas
the other, the objectives.

Let’s think about an everyday situation. Two friends are having dinner
together: one wants to have Italian, and the other really feels like having
Japanese.

In order not to harm the relationship, the one who wants to have Italian
gives it up, although he doesn’t even like Japanese food.

Two siblings want to watch different TV shows, but one of them is more
emphatic, and the other one gives in to avoid confrontation.

And now you may be thinking, oh, but that can only happen when the
parties have a well-established relationship.

Not really.

How many times have you paid for a bill you did not agree with
just because you didn’t want to go through the emotional stress of
complaining? Or failed to demand higher quality services and ended up
paying a lot more for it than you thought it was actually worth? How
many times have you given up on your objectives to avoid conflict?

This is how we land on win-lose outcomes: one party reaches their


objective and the other gives in to preserve the relationship.

In the short-term, it may seem to work all right. Since each party
overestimates a different aspect, you might think that, in the end, each
party got what they value the most.

But, in the long run, that is not what happens. If you have a friend who is
fully aware you don’t like Japanese food and is still happy to let you give
up what you would have in favor of his or her wishes, how often would
you be willing to go out for dinner with this friend again?

If you agree on a price to have your hair cut and end up not liking it,
would you go back to the same hairdresser?

In win-lose outcomes, only one person is actually concerned about the


relationship. And every successful long-term relationship takes the
commitment of all people involved.

< voltar para o índice


61
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

A NE GOCIAÇÃO GANHA-PERDE

Para alguém ganhar, outro alguém tem que perder.

Você provavelmente já ouviu ou até mesmo falou essa frase. Ganha-


perde é talvez o primeiro resultado que vem à mente da maioria das
pessoas quando elas pensam em negociação: uma competição entre
duas partes opostas.

Mas de quem é a culpa? A competição está em toda parte. Somos criados


assistindo a competições esportivas em que há ganhadores e perdedores.
Competimos com outros candidatos por uma vaga de emprego. Votamos
em pessoas que vão nos representar — eleições são uma competição. E,
ao pensarmos sobre isso, mesmo no sistema jurídico, duas partes opostas
defendem seus interesses, e apenas uma prevalece.

Em um mundo tão competitivo, é apenas natural que nós preparemos


nossas mentes para competir, mesmo com aqueles que mais prezamos.
Os membros de uma equipe competem entre si, colegas de sala
competem pela nota mais alta, e até mesmo irmãos competem pela
atenção de seus pais, quando, na verdade, todos eles deveriam ter
apenas uma coisa em mente: colaboração.

Mas como entramos nessa confusão? Vamos tentar resolver isso.

Aprendemos que quando ambas as partes em uma negociação


superestimam o relacionamento em detrimento de seus objetivos, ou
quando ambas as partes subestimam o relacionamento e só conseguem
pensar em seus próprios interesses, o resultado mais provável é que
nenhuma delas alcançará seus objetivos, e elas perdem a oportunidade
de melhorar a relação; na verdade, ela pode até piorar. Em outras
palavras, provavelmente chegará a um resultado perde-perde.

Isso acontece quando os dois principais aspectos de uma negociação —


interesses e relacionamento — estão desequilibrados.

Em um resultado ganha-perde, esses aspectos também estão


desequilibrados. Mas ao invés de ambas as partes subestimarem o
relacionamento ou seus objetivos, o que vemos aqui é que uma parte
superestima o relacionamento, enquanto a outra, os objetivos.

Vamos pensar em uma situação cotidiana: dois amigos vão jantar juntos;
um quer comida italiana e o outro está com muita vontade de comida
japonesa.

< voltar para o índice


62
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Para não prejudicar o relacionamento, aquele que quer comida italiana


desiste, embora ele nem goste de comida japonesa.

Dois irmãos querem assistir a programas de TV diferentes, mas um


deles é mais enfático, e o outro cede para evitar confronto.

E agora você pode estar pensando, ah, mas isso só pode acontecer
quando os envolvidos têm um relacionamento bem estabelecido.

Não é bem assim.

Quantas vezes você pagou por uma conta com a qual não concordou só
porque você não queria passar pelo estresse emocional de reclamar? Ou
deixou de exigir serviços de melhor qualidade e acabou pagando muito
mais por eles do que você achava que realmente valia a pena? Quantas
vezes você desistiu dos seus objetivos para evitar conflitos?

É assim que chegamos a negociações ganha-perde: uma parte alcança


seu objetivo e a outra cede para preservar o relacionamento.

A curto prazo, pode parecer funcionar bem. Uma vez que cada um dos
envolvidos superestima um aspecto diferente, você pode pensar que, no
final, cada parte tem o que mais valoriza.

Mas, a longo prazo, não é isso que acontece. Se você tem um amigo que
está totalmente ciente de que você não gosta de comida japonesa, e
ainda assim fica feliz em deixá-lo desistir do que você gostaria de comer
em favor de seus desejos, quantas vezes você estaria disposto a sair
para jantar com esse amigo novamente?

Se você acerta um preço para cortar o cabelo e acaba não gostando,


você voltaria ao mesmo cabeleireiro?

Em negociações ganha-perde, apenas uma pessoa está realmente


preocupada com o relacionamento. E todo relacionamento duradouro e
de sucesso exige o comprometimento de todas as pessoas envolvidas.

< voltar para o índice


63
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 2.

In the previous chapter, you saw the lose-lose outcome. In this chapter, you will see another
possible outcome for a negotiation: win-lose.
Observe:

Win-lose is perhaps the first outcome that pops into most people’s minds when they
think about negotiation: a competition between two opposing parties.
Ganha-perde é talvez o primeiro resultado que vem à mente da maioria das pessoas
quando pensam em negociação: uma competição entre duas partes opostas.

In the previous sentence, the word perhaps is an adverb used to say that something has a
probability of being true. It is a synonym for maybe, which is also used to express probability.
The expression to pop into people’s minds means that a thought or an idea suddenly forms in
someone’s head. The words to pop and party can have different meanings:

DIFFERENT MEANINGS

to pop into to pop


vir à estourar

party party
festa parte

The literal definition of the verb to pop is to burst, or to make something burst, with a short
explosive sound. This verb is not to be taken literally in the expression to pop into one’s mind.
The word party can be used to refer to a social event at which people meet to celebrate
something or to have fun. However, that is not the case in the context of the previous sentence.
Here, the word parties refers to the people or a group of people involved in a negotiation.
The sentence about the win-lose outcome refers to a competition between opposing parties.
Between is a word that usually refers to two elements; in this case, two parties that are
negotiating.

< voltar para o índice


64
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

There are other ways to talk about competition between two or more elements. For instance:

We compete with other applicants for a job position.


Nós competimos com outros candidatos por uma vaga de emprego.

We compete with another applicant for a job position.


Nós competimos com um outro candidato por uma vaga de emprego.

These two sentences differ in one thing: the first one refers to a competition with
more than one applicant. Note that the word applicants is in the plural form. To
refer to that, we use other. The second one refers to a competition with just one
applicant, in the singular form. In this case, we use another.
In both sentences, notice that the preposition for refers to the thing for which
people are competing. In this case, for a job position.
In these two examples, the verb to compete was followed by with, since we say
to compete with someone else.
But there is another preposition you can use: against. For example:

Politicians compete against each other for our votes.


Políticos competem uns com os outros pelos nossos votos.
Políticos competem entre si pelos nossos votos.

Against is a preposition that brings the idea of opposition. It is used to say who
someone is competing with or trying to defeat. In the previous sentence, note
that each other brings a sense of reciprocity. It is used to say that each of two
or more people does something to the other or others. Observe that the noun
politicians is in the plural, so it could be two or more.
However, each other can also be used to talk about a singular element. Observe:

Mark and Vanessa compete against each other for our votes.
Mark e Vanessa competem um contra o outro pelos nossos votos.
Mark e Vanessa competem entre si pelos nossos votos.

This sentence makes it truly clear that each other refers to Mark and Vanessa,
one competing against the other.

< voltar para o índice


65
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

You could also use one another. Observe:

Mark and Vanessa compete against one another for our votes.
Mark e Vanessa competem um contra o outro pelos nossos votos.

The idea is still the same. Only, one another already makes it very clear that you
are talking about one person in relation to another, no more than that.
All these ways of talking about competition are a good representation of how
competitiveness is part of our daily lives. But there may be a consequence to it.
Take a look:

In such a competitive world, it’s only natural that we set up our minds
to compete, even with those we cherish the most.
Em um mundo tão competitivo, é apenas natural que nós preparemos
nossas mentes para competir, mesmo com aqueles que mais prezamos.

Notice that set up is a phrasal verb that, in this context, is the same as prepare.
In this case, the adverb only emphasizes the adjective it refers to: natural. The
sentence would be grammatically correct without the adverb, but it would lose
some of its impact. Even is another word that is used for emphasis: it introduces
an idea or a concept that can be surprising, such as competing with the ones we
love the most. And finally, the word such is being used to emphasize a quality
that is attributed to a noun, which in this sentence, is world.
There is yet another word that can be used for emphasis: so.
Observe:

In a world so competitive that it’s only natural that we set up our


minds to compete, even with those we cherish the most.
Em um mundo tão competitivo que é apenas natural que nós preparemos
nossas mentes para competir, mesmo com aqueles que mais prezamos.

So refers to the adjective competitive. It is not essential to the sentence, but it


reinforces how competitive the world is. Here is a list of words that can be used
for emphasis:

< voltar para o índice


66
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

WORDS FOR EMPHASIS

only even such so


apenas mesmo tão tão

So is often used with that to convey the idea that someone or something has a certain quality
to such an extent, that something happens as a consequence of it. Check out an example of this
use of so…that:

He is so talented that he won five awards.


Ele é tão talentoso que ganhou cinco prêmios.

In the previous sentence, so is immediately followed by the adjective it refers to—talented.


What this means is that the degree of this quality, talented, leads to the outcome that is
introduced by that. This is one way of emphasizing an idea in the discourse.
But instead of emphasizing an idea, you may want to present opposing ideas in a sentence.
Some words can help you do that: instead of, but, and whereas. These words introduce ideas
that are being put in parallel, each in its own way.
Observe the meaning and examples with these aforementioned words:

OPPOSING IDEAS

but used to connect opposing ideas


mas usado para conectar ideias contrárias

Two siblings want to watch different TV shows, but one of them is more emphatic,
and the other one gives in to avoid confrontation.
Dois irmãos querem ver programas de TV diferentes, mas um deles é mais enfático, e o
outro cede para evitar o confronto.

whereas used to compare different situations/elements


ao passo que usado para comparar situações/elementos diferentes

One of them is more emphatic whereas the other one gives in to avoid confrontation.
Um deles é mais enfático, ao passo que o outro cede para evitar confronto.

< voltar para o índice


67
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

instead of used to present a situation or element that replaces another


ao invés de usado para apresentar situação ou elemento em substituição a outro

I use my bike instead of my car.


Eu uso minha bicicleta ao invés do meu carro.

Let’s compare the previous examples; in the first one, but links two opposing
elements: even though the two siblings want to watch different shows, one of
them ends up giving in. To give in means to finally accept an unwanted situation.
In the second sentence, whereas is being used to show the difference between
two people: one is more emphatic and the other one gives in easily. Finally, in the
sentence formed with instead of, we refer to a replacement: it is not a comparison
nor an opposition, but one element, a bike, that replaces another, the car.
With that in mind, observe this sentence:

In a win-lose outcome, interests and relationships are unbalanced. But


instead of both parties underestimating the relationship or their objectives,
what we see here is that one party overestimates the relationship, whereas
the other, the objectives.
Em um resultado ganha-perde, interesses e relacionamentos são
desequilibrados. Mas ao invés de ambas as partes subestimarem o
relacionamento ou seus objetivos, o que vemos aqui é que uma parte
superestima o relacionamento, enquanto a outra, os objetivos.

In the previous example, the word but introduces an opposing idea. It is followed by
instead of, which introduces a substitution: one situation will happen in replacement
of another. Finally, there is the word whereas, which shows that the two parties
overestimate different things.
Observe that the words one and the other refer to the parties of the negotiation.
The word both means the two of something, it is used to talk about two things
together.
Now, getting back to the matter of negotiation, it is safe to say that overestimating
only the relationship or the objectives is something very frequent. Take a look:

How many times have you paid for a bill you did not agree with
just because you didn’t want to go through the emotional stress of
complaining?
Quantas vezes você pagou por uma conta com a qual não concordou só
porque você não queria passar pelo estresse emocional de reclamar?

< voltar para o índice


68
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

In the previous sentence, the verb to pay is followed by the preposition for, and the verb to agree
is followed by the preposition with. This happens because these prepositions, for and with, are
part of the complements that follow the verbs to pay and to agree. For example, when we pay, we
pay for something, in the case of this sentence, for the bill. And when we agree, we can say we
agree with someone. So, here, for and with are part of the complements.
Phrasal verbs, on the other hand, are idiomatic phrases that consist of a verb and a particle, that
can be, for example, a preposition. This means that the preposition is part of the verb.
Take a look at the following verb and phrasal verb:

VERBS & PHRASAL VERBS

to go to go through
ir passar por / vivenciar uma situação difícil

The verb to go means to move, to travel, or to proceed. It can be followed by a preposition or


not. Now, note that the phrasal verb to go through is formed by the verb to go + through. The
word through is part of the phrasal verb, which has a completely different meaning than its
separate parts.
We can also form phrasal verbs with the verb to give.
Look at them:

VERBS & PHRASAL VERBS

to give to give up to give in


dar desistir ceder

The verb to give means to let someone have something or to provide something to someone.
This verb is used to form two different phrasal verbs: to give up and to give in.
Look at two examples with these phrasal verbs:

How many times have you given up on your objective to avoid conflict?
Quantas vezes você desistiu do seu objetivo para evitar conflitos?

One party reaches their objective and the other gives in to preserve the relationship.
Uma parte alcança seu objetivo e a outra cede para preservar o relacionamento.

< voltar para o índice


69
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

The phrasal verb to give up, which is formed by to give + up, means to stop doing
something or to leave it. It has a different meaning and a different preposition than
to give in. This phrasal verb is formed by to give + in and it means to finally agree or
accept to do something you were opposed to.
There is also a phrasal verb formed with the verb to end, look:

VERBS & PHRASAL VERBS

to end to end up
acabar acabar

The verb to end means to stop doing something or to finish it. It is the opposite of to
start or to begin. This verb is used to form the phrasal verb to end up, which means
to be in a particular situation after a series of unwanted or unplanned events take
place.
Now, observe the phrasal verb to end up in a sentence:

How many times have you failed to demand higher quality services and
ended up paying a lot more for it than you thought it was actually worth?
Quantas vezes você deixou de exigir serviços de melhor qualidade e acabou
pagando muito mais por eles do que você achava que realmente valia a pena?

Note that to end up is conjugated in the simple past, for it ends in -ED. Next,
observe the expression to be worth, also conjugated in the simple past, which
means to have value.
Phrasal verbs may also be used in different verb forms. Look at this phrasal verb
in another sentence:

If you agree on a price to have your hair cut and end up not liking it,
would you go back to the same hairdresser?
Se você acerta um preço para cortar o cabelo e acaba não gostando, você
voltaria ao mesmo cabeleireiro?

< voltar para o índice


70
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

In this sentence, the phrasal verb end up is conjugated in the simple present, but
it maintains its meaning of finding yourself in an unplanned situation. Observe
that this sentence is introduced by if. It establishes a relation of cause and
consequence. The consequence is imaginary and expressed by the modal verb
would + the phrasal verb to go back. This phrasal verb is formed by to go +
back and it means to return.

VERBS & PHRASAL VERBS

to go to go back
ir voltar/retornar

By itself, the verb to go has a different meaning, as we have seen previously in


this chapter. By adding back to this verb, it gains a new meaning.
The verb to agree is also used to form a phrasal verb: to agree on. It means to
reach an agreement after making a deal with someone.
Check it out:

VERBS & PHRASAL VERBS

to agree on
to agree
concordar em fazer algo / acertar
concordar
de fazer algo de certa maneira

It is important to be aware that, by themselves, the main verbs, such as to agree


or to go, have a different meaning than when they are a part of a phrasal verb.
So, their use will affect the context.
There is another type of verb that affects the context: modal verbs. They do so
by modifying the meaning of another verb.
For instance, would is a type of modal verb that can express a past intention or
an imaginary situation. Observe the modal verb would in the following sentence:

< voltar para o índice


71
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

If you have a friend who is fully aware you don’t like Japanese food and
is still happy to let you give up what you would have in favor of his or
her wishes, how often would you be willing to go out for dinner with
this friend again?
Se você tem um amigo que está totalmente ciente de que você não gosta
de comida japonesa e ainda assim fica feliz em deixá-lo desistir do que você
gostaria de comer em favor dos desejos dele ou dela, quantas vezes você
estaria disposto a sair para jantar com esse amigo novamente?

The first would of the sentence refers to the verb to have, would have, and it
conveys a sense of past intention to this verb. The verb to have in this sentence
is a synonym of the verb to eat. The second verb would is followed by be willing:
would you be willing. It speaks of an imaginary consequence of the situation that
is stated at the beginning of the sentence after if. By starting with if and using
the modal verb would after the comma, this sentence establishes a cause-and-
consequence relationship.
To go out is also a phrasal verb that means to leave the place where you live,
especially to have fun. To be willing is an expression that means to be prepared
to do something.

Now you know how to express opposing,


different, or alternative ideas, and how to
emphasize ideas in the speech. You also learned
many phrasal verbs and the ideas that the modal
verb would may convey.

< voltar para o índice


72
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 3.

Activities
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.

( 1 ) sair para se ( 7 ) perder ( ) to give up ( ) to go through


divertir
( 8 ) voltar/retornar ( ) to win ( ) to agree on
( 2 ) ceder
( 9 ) passar por / ( ) to go back ( ) whereas
( 3 ) desistir vivenciar uma
( ) but ( ) to set up
situação difícil
( 4 ) acertar /
( ) instead of ( ) to give in
concordar ( 10 ) mas
( ) to go out ( ) to lose
( 5 ) preparar ( 11 ) ao passo que

( 6 ) ganhar ( 12 ) ao invés de

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words, according to the translation:

1. One party reaches their objective and the other to preserve


the relationship.
Uma parte alcança seu objetivo e a outra cede para preservar o relacionamento.

2. If you a price to have your hair cut and end up not liking it, …
Se você acerta um preço para cortar o cabelo e acaba não gostando, ...

3. …would you to the same hairdresser?


…você voltaria ao mesmo cabeleireiro?

4. How often would you be willing to for dinner with this friend again?
Quantas vezes você estaria disposto a sair para jantar com esse amigo novamente?

5. You didn’t want to the emotional stress of complaining?


Você não queria passar pelo estresse emocional de reclamar?

< voltar para o índice


73
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

6. In such a competitive world, it’s only natural that we our minds to


compete, even with those we cherish the most.
Em um mundo tão competitivo, é apenas natural que nós preparemos nossas mentes
para competir, mesmo com aqueles que mais prezamos.

6. set up 12. instead of 6. to win


5. go through 11. whereas 5. to set up
4. go out 10. but 4. to agree on
3. go back 9. to go through 3. to give up
2. agree on 8. to go back 2. to give in
1. gives in 7. to lose 1. to go out
Activity B – Answers Activity A – Answers

< voltar para o índice


74
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 4.

In this chapter, we will study the modal verb would. As a modal verb, it follows
the general structures you have seen so far. Let’s review them.
Observe the affirmative form of the modal verb would:

MODAL VERB WOULD – BASIC STRUCTURE

Affirmative Form
subject + modal verb + main verb + complement
sujeito + verbo modal + verbo principal + complemento

You would go back to the same hairdresser.


Você voltaria ao mesmo cabeleireiro.

The affirmative form will also follow the basic structure you have seen so far: the
subject will come first, followed by the modal verb. Then we will have the main
verb in its base form, followed by the complement.
Now, observe the negative form of the modal verb would:

MODAL VERB WOULD – BASIC STRUCTURE

Negative Form
subject + modal verb + not + main verb + complement
sujeito + verbo modal + not + verbo principal + complemento

You would not go back to the same hairdresser.


Você não voltaria ao mesmo cabeleireiro.

The negative form follows a similar structure of the affirmative form; however,
the modal verb is followed by not, and then we have the main verb in its base
form.
And lastly, take a look at the interrogative form of the modal verb would:

< voltar para o índice


75
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

MODAL VERB WOULD – BASIC STRUCTURE

Interrogative Form
modal verb + subject + main verb + complement
verbo modal + sujeito + verbo principal + complemento

Would you go back to the same hairdresser?


Você voltaria ao mesmo cabeleireiro?

Since this modal verb follows the same structure as all the others like it, when
asking a question with would, the modal verb will be the first element of the
sentence, followed by the subject, which in this case is you; then, we will have
the main verb in its base form, which in this case is the phrasal verb go back, and
the rest of the sentence is the complement.
Would is often used to raise a hypothetical and imaginary situation in
conditional sentences. This conditional will be formed with the if-clause in the
simple past and the main clause is formed with the modal verb would. So, to
better understand the conditional, take a look at the simple past:

SIMPLE PAST
Use

The simple past refers to situations and actions that happened and
ended in the past.
O simple past se refere a situações e ações que aconteceram e
terminaram no passado.

Just as it happens in the simple present, the conjugations of the verb to be in the
simple past will also be different from the conjugations of all the other verbs.
There are two possible conjugations of the verb to be in the simple past: was and
were. We use was for I, he, she, and it. And we use were for we, you, and they.
The structure of the affirmative form of the verb to be in the simple past is the
same as the structure of the affirmative form of the verb to be in the simple
present.
Observe:

< voltar para o índice


76
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

SIMPLE PAST – TO BE

Affirmative Form
subject + main verb + complement
sujeito + verbo principal + complemento

She was in Rio last month.


Ela estava no Rio no mês passado.

They were in Rio last month.


Eles estavam no Rio no mês passado.

Note that both sentences are in the affirmative form in the simple past, and both
follow the same structure. The only thing that changes is the conjugation of the
verb, according to the subject. It is important to note that, in the complement, you
have a clear information about when in the past the action happened: last month.
This may happen, but even if it does not, the simple past is always used to talk
about something that started and ended in the past.
To form the negative of the simple past, you will use the negative particle not.
Take a look at the examples you have just seen in the negative form:

SIMPLE PAST – TO BE

Negative Form
subject + main verb + not + complement
sujeito + verbo principal + not + complemento

She was not / wasn’t in Rio last month.


Ela não estava no Rio no mês passado.

They were not / weren’t in Rio last month.


Eles não estavam no Rio no mês passado.

Both sentences follow the same structure, with changes only to their
conjugations according to the subject. The verb is closely followed by not, thus
marking the negative. It is possible to contract the verb to be in the negative
form. It does not change the meaning of the sentence; however, the contracted
form is not as emphatic as the non-contracted one.

< voltar para o índice


77
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

The interrogative form of the verb to be in the simple past is as follows:

SIMPLE PAST – TO BE

Interrogative Form
main verb + subject + complement
verbo principal + sujeito + complemento

Was she in Rio last month?


Ela estava no Rio no mês passado?

Were they in Rio last month?


Eles estavam no Rio no mês passado?

As you can see, the verb precedes the subject, and it will be conjugated
accordingly.
It is important to notice that the structure of affirmative, negative, and
interrogative sentences with the verb to be will be the same, both for the simple
present and for the simple past, regardless of the subject. The difference is in the
conjugation of the main verb, which will vary according to the moment when the
situation occurs and with the subject to which it is related.
To form the simple past of the other verbs rather than to be, the first thing you
need to know is that verbs can be regular or irregular. Differently from the verb
to be, the conjugations in the simple past for other verbs do not vary according
to the subject. It is the same for all of them.
In the case of regular verbs, we add the suffix -ED to the verb. The conjugation
may vary depending on the base form of the verb. The verbs to fail, to try and
to love are regular, and their conjugations is formed by adding the suffix -ED;
however, there will be variations between them because their base forms are
different.
Take a look at the conjugations of these verbs in the simple past:

SIMPLE PAST – RE GUL AR VERBS

GENERAL RULE: + -ED


Regra geral: + -ED

to fail – failed to try – tried to love – loved


falhar – falhou tentar – tentou amar – amou

< voltar para o índice


78
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Observe that there are some differences in spelling depending on the termination
of the verb in the infinitive form. For instance, the verb to fail is regular and ends
in a consonant, so we simply add the suffix -ED: failed. The verb to try is regular
and ends in -Y, so the word loses the -Y, which is then replaced by -IED. The
verb to love is also regular and it already ends in -E. So, we simply add the letter
-D and it becomes loved.
Observe these verbs in sentences:

SIMPLE PAST – OTHER VERBS

Affirmative Form
subject + main verb + complement
sujeito + verbo principal + complemento

You failed to demand higher quality services.


Você falhou em exigir serviços de maior qualidade.

The pilot tried to control the plane through the snowstorm.


O piloto tentou controlar o avião através da tempestade de neve.

I loved my teachers when I was a child.


Eu amava meus professores quando eu era criança.

Notice that the affirmative form in the simple past will follow the same structure
as the affirmative form of the simple present, which is subject + main verb +
complement. That happens for all verbs, including the verb to be. The changes
occur in the conjugation of the main verb.
The irregular verbs other than to be will also follow this structure in the
affirmative form. However, their conjugation will be a little different. Because
they are irregular, there is no general rule to be followed, as you have just seen
with the regular ones. Some irregular verbs will be quite different from their base
form, such as to go. When conjugated in the simple past, it becomes went. But
other irregular verbs will not be that different from their base form, such as to
give, whose conjugation in the simple past is gave.
Look at these irregular verbs in sentences:

< voltar para o índice


79
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

SIMPLE PAST – IRRE GUL AR VERBS

Affirmative Form
subject + main verb + complement
sujeito + verbo principal + complemento

She gave in after three hours of negotiations.


Ela cedeu após três horas de negociações.

They went out for dinner.


Eles saíram para jantar.

The affirmative form of the irregular verbs in the simple past will follow the same
structure as the affirmative form of regular verbs in the simple past. In the first
sentence, the subject, she, is the first element of the sentence, followed by the
main verb, that is, the phrasal verb gave in. Everything that comes after is the
complement. The same happens with the second sentence. The phrasal verb
went out follows the subject, they, and is conjugated accordingly. The rest of the
sentence is the complement.
The phrasal verbs to give in and to go out are formed with irregular verbs,
so they have irregular conjugations in the simple past. However, the sentence
structure in the affirmative is the same as you have seen so far.
Differently from the verb to be, with all the other verbs, both regular and irregular,
we will need the help of the auxiliary verb did to create sentences in the
interrogative and negative forms. Did is the conjugation of the auxiliary verb do in
the past.
Observe the general structure of the negative form in the simple past:

SIMPLE PAST – OTHER VERBS

Negative Form
subject + auxiliary verb + not + main verb in the base form + complement
sujeito + verbo auxiliar + not + verbo principal na forma base + complemento

As you can see, to form the negative, we use did followed by not: did + not.
Then, the main verb in its base form will follow. This goes for all subjects, even
the third person singular.

< voltar para o índice


80
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Let’s analyze some examples in the negative form:

SIMPLE PAST – OTHER VERBS


Negative Form

I paid for a bill I did not agree with because I did not want the emotional
stress of arguing.
Eu paguei por uma conta com a qual eu não concordei porque eu não queria o
estresse emocional de discutir.

There are two regular verbs conjugated in the negative form of the simple past in this
sentence: to agree and to want. Both are in their base form and preceded by did not.
Now, look at another example in the negative form, but this time with an irregular verb:

SIMPLE PAST – OTHER VERBS


Negative Form

You didn’t go out for dinner.


Vocês não saíram para jantar.

The subject, you, opens the sentence. Then, there is the auxiliary verb did followed
by the negative particle not. Notice it is contracted as didn’t. The phrasal verb to
go out will come next in its base form. The rest of the sentence is the complement.
Remember that to go out is a phrasal verb formed with an irregular verb.
It is important to be aware that the contracted form didn’t is less emphatic than the
non-contracted form did not.
As previously mentioned, the structure of sentences in the interrogative form for
verbs different from to be in the simple past also needs the auxiliary verb did. It will
be the first element of the sentence. Again, this general structure will be just like the
structure of verbs other than to be in the simple present. The difference will be the
auxiliary verb, which, instead of do, will be conjugated in the past as did.
For example:

< voltar para o índice


81
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

SIMPLE PAST – IRRE GUL AR VERBS

Interrogative Form
auxiliary verb + subject + main verb in the base form + complement
verbo auxiliar + sujeito + verbo principal na forma base + complemento

Did they go out for dinner?


Eles saíram para jantar?

Did the pilot try to control the plane through the snowstorm?
O piloto tentou controlar o avião através da tempestade de neve?

Notice that even though the phrasal verb to go out is formed with an irregular verb, it
needs the auxiliary verb did in the interrogative form, just as the regular verb to try does.
The simple past is used to talk about actions that happened at a specific time in the past.
But it will also be used in the structure of the second conditional. In it, the simple past
expresses a hypothetical condition, while the consequence will be introduced by would.
Check it out:

SE COND CONDITIONAL

If I had money, I would travel all the time.


Se eu tivesse dinheiro, eu viajaria o tempo inteiro.

The conjunction if introduces a hypothetical scenario, and it is expressed with the verb
to have in the simple past: had. As you can see, to have is an irregular verb. After the
comma, the consequence is introduced by the modal verb would and the main verb to
travel. This kind of conditional sentence conveys the idea that both the condition and the
consequence are hypothetical.
The if-clause and the main clause may be inverted in the second conditional, without
changing the idea it conveys. Observe:

SE COND CONDITIONAL

If we hired more people, we would finish the project on time.


Se nós contratássemos mais pessoas, nós terminaríamos o projeto a tempo.

We would finish the project on time if we hired more people.


Nós terminaríamos o projeto a tempo se nós contratássemos mais pessoas.

< voltar para o índice


82
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Both these sentences talk about the same hypothetical scenario, but, in the
first one, the if-clause comes at the beginning, and, in the second one, the main
clause is at the beginning. In both cases, the hypothetical condition or scenario is
expressed in the simple past: hired, which is the conjugation of the regular verb
to hire in the simple past. The hypothetical consequence is expressed by the
modal verb would and the main verb to finish.
Notice that when the if-clause comes first, it is separated from the main clause
with a comma. On the other hand, when the main clause comes first, we will no
longer use a comma but join both clauses with the word if.
So far, you have seen some hypothetical situations with several different verbs,
but not with the verb to be. There will be a change in its conjugation when it is
used in the if-clause. Take a look:

CONDITIONAL – MODAL VERB WOULD

If I were you, I would travel all the time.


Se eu fosse você, eu viajaria o tempo inteiro.

If they were rich, they would travel all the time.


Se eles fossem ricos, eles viajariam o tempo inteiro.

As you can see, when the verb to be is used in conditionals that are imaginary, it
is conjugated as were for all subjects. That is why in the first sentence, the verb
is conjugated as were even though the subject is in the first person singular. The
consequence is expressed by the modal verb would and the main verb in its base
form, travel.
Even though you can hear people saying if I was rich, I would travel all the time,
this is not grammatically correct. You cannot use was because you are not talking
about a real past action – you are actually talking about an imaginary situation.

In this part of the chapter, you saw the modal verb would, the
simple past, and you have learned the second conditional. If
you want to know more about these topics, you can refer to the
Grammar Guide section at the end of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Conditionals Page 191


Modal Verb Would Page 217
Simple Past – Other Verbs Page 243
Simple Past – Verb To Be Page 249

< voltar para o índice


83
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 5.

Activities
A. Change the sentences into the negative or interrogative form as indicated:

1. You would go back to the same hairdresser.


Você voltaria ao mesmo cabeleireiro.
(interrogative)

2. She gave in after three hours of negotiations.


Ela cedeu após três horas de negociações.
( negative)

3. They went out for dinner.


Eles saíram para jantar.
( negative)

4. She was in Rio last month.


Ela estava no Rio no mês passado.
(interrogative)

5. They were in Miami last year.


Eles estavam em Miami no ano passado.
( negative)

6. You failed to demand higher quality services.


Você deixou de exigir serviços de melhor qualidade.
(interrogative)

7. The pilot tried to control the plane through the snowstorm.


O piloto tentou controlar o avião através da tempestade de neve.
(interrogative)

8. I loved my teachers when I was a child.


Eu amava meus professores quando eu era criança.
( negative)

< voltar para o índice


84
Chapter 3 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

B. Fill in the blanks with the missing verbs:

1. If I you, I would travel all the time.


Se eu fosse você, eu viajaria o tempo inteiro.

2. If I had money, I all the time.


Se eu tivesse dinheiro, eu viajaria o tempo inteiro.

3. If they rich, they would travel all the time.


Se eles fossem ricos, eles viajariam o tempo inteiro.

4. If we hired more people, we the project on time.


Se nós contratássemos mais pessoas, nós terminaríamos o projeto a tempo.

5. If you agree on a price to have your hair cut and end up not liking it,
to the same hairdresser?
Se você acerta um preço para cortar o cabelo e acaba não gostando, você voltaria ao mesmo
cabeleireiro?

6. If you always have to give up on your preferences to be with your friend,


to go out with that friend again?
Se você sempre tem que desistir das suas preferências para estar com seu amigo, você
estaria disposto a sair com esse amigo de novo?

8. I did not / didn’t love my teachers when I was a child.


7. Did the pilot try to control the plane through the snowstorm?
6. would you be willing 6. Did you fail to demand higher quality services?
5. would you go back 5. They were not / weren’t in Miami last year.
4. would finish 4. Was she in Rio last month?
3. were 3. They did not / didn’t go out for dinner.
2. would travel 2. She did not / didn’t give in after three hours of negotiations.
1. were 1. Would you go back to the same hairdresser?
Activity B – Answers Activity A – Answers

< voltar para o índice


85
4
Compromise
Compromise
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 1.

In this chapter, you will learn ways of expressing conditions and reason. You
will also learn some common verbs, nouns, and adjectives in the context of
agreements.
Now look at the script of Compromise.

COMPROMISE

As long as both parties can balance their objectives and relationship,


they can always meet halfway.

So far, I’ve emphasized the main concepts of a negotiation: to achieve


interests and improve relationships.

And we’ve seen the most likely outcomes when these aspects are
unbalanced, either if they are equally unbalanced for both parties in a
negotiation or if each party overestimates one of its aspects.

But when both parties truly acknowledge that the objectives and the
relationship have equal importance in a negotiation, they can reach a
compromise.

Compromise happens when each party gives in a little bit in order


for both of them to have their interests partially met. And since both
consider the other party’s interest and not only their own, none of them
will feel let down.

Let’s think of a simple example of compromise. Let’s say that in a


household, the parents leave their two kids 20 dollars every day for their
needs—10 for each. One morning, the parents mistake the 10-dollar
bills for 5-dollar bills and end up leaving only 10 instead of 20.

Both kids need 10 dollars per day, and having less will cause them to
make some changes to their daily schedule. But they agree on keeping 5
dollars each.

< voltar para o índice


87
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

So, they both compromise on their objectives, which was to get the 10
dollars, but they also consider that it’s not worth to have 10 dollars for
yourself if your sibling ends up with nothing.

If you want to hire a service for 150 dollars and you are charged 200
dollars, you negotiate and compromise on 175 dollars.

If you want to have a deadline in two days and your co-worker wants it
in four, you compromise on a three-day deadline.

That is what compromise is all about: both parties focus on the


relationship because this shows they care. And both parties have their
interests partially met.

"Not too bad", you might be thinking.

And you are right. This is not too bad. But not the best either.

Meeting halfway is always the second-best option. But should we settle


for second best?

CONSENSO

Contanto que ambas as partes consigam equilibrar seus objetivos e o


relacionamento, elas sempre podem chegar a um meio-termo.

Até agora, enfatizei os principais conceitos de uma negociação:


satisfazer interesses e melhorar os relacionamentos.

E vimos as negociações mais prováveis quando estes aspectos estão


desequilibrados, sejam eles igualmente desequilibrados para ambas as
partes em uma negociação, ou caso cada parte superestime um de seus
aspectos.

Mas quando ambas as partes realmente reconhecem que os objetivos


e o relacionamento têm igual importância em uma negociação, elas
podem chegar a um consenso.

< voltar para o índice


88
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

O consenso acontece quando cada parte cede um pouco para que


ambas tenham seus interesses parcialmente atendidos. E como ambas
consideram o interesse da outra parte e não apenas o seu, nenhuma
delas se sentirá decepcionada.

Vamos pensar em um simples exemplo de consenso. Digamos que em


uma casa, os pais deixam a seus dois filhos 20 dólares todos os dias
para cobrir suas necessidades — 10 para cada um. Uma manhã, os pais
confundem as notas de 10 dólares por notas de 5 dólares e acabam
deixando apenas 10 ao invés de 20.

Ambas as crianças precisam de 10 dólares por dia e ter menos


ocasionará algumas mudanças em seus planos. Mas eles concordam em
ficar com 5 dólares cada.

Então, ambos chegam a um consenso em seus objetivos, que era


conseguir os 10 dólares, mas também consideram que não vale a pena
ter 10 dólares só para si se seu irmão acaba sem nada.

Se você quer contratar um serviço por 150 dólares e cobram 200


dólares, vocês negociam e chegam a um consenso de 175 dólares.

Se você quer ter um prazo de dois dias e seu colega quer um de quatro
dias, vocês chegam em um consenso de um prazo de três dias.

É disso que se trata um consenso: ambas as partes se concentram no


relacionamento porque isto mostra que se importam. E ambas as partes
têm seus interesses parcialmente atendidos.

"Nada mal", você pode estar pensando.

E você está certo. Isso não é tão ruim. Mas também não é o melhor.

Encontrar o meio-termo é sempre a segunda melhor opção. Mas


devemos nos contentar com a segunda melhor?

< voltar para o índice


89
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 2.

During negotiations, difficulties arise when we have unbalanced relationships


and objectives. However, it is possible to reach an agreement that is relatively
satisfactory for everyone involved:

As long as both parties can balance their objectives and relationship,


they can always meet halfway.
Contanto que ambas as partes consigam equilibrar seus objetivos e o
relacionamento, elas sempre podem chegar a um meio-termo.

To meet halfway is an expression that means to concede on some things or


points that you want, in order to gain others.
Note that in this sentence, as long as is used to indicate that one thing depends
on another to happen or to be true. That is, as long as indicates a condition and
it could be replaced by provided that, on condition that or if:

WORDS THAT INTRODUCE CONDITION

as long as provided that


contanto que desde que

on condition that if
sob a condição de que se

You can also introduce a condition using when, but only in conditional sentences
that refer to real situations. It is commonly used when referring to predictable or
repeated situations.
So, you can say:

< voltar para o índice


90
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

When both parties truly acknowledge that the objectives and the relationship have
equal importance in a negotiation, they can reach a compromise.
Quando ambas as partes realmente reconhecem que os objetivos e o relacionamento têm
igual importância em uma negociação, elas podem chegar a um consenso.

In this sentence, when does not refer to a moment in time; it introduces a condition. This condition
conveys the idea that there is a cause-and-consequence relationship between two situations, that
is, one depends on the other to happen. The condition that is introduced by when is described with
the verb to acknowledge, which can mean to admit or to accept something as true.
Careful not to confuse the verb to acknowledge with the verb to know. They may look somewhat
similar, but they have different meanings. Look:

to acknowledge = to admit or to accept that something is true or that a situation exists


reconhecer = admitir ou aceitar que algo é verdade ou que uma situação existe

to know = to be aware of something, to have knowledge regarding something, to have


developed a relationship with someone
saber/conhecer = estar ciente de algo, ter conhecimento relativo a algo, ter desenvolvido um
relacionamento com alguém

The verb to know can have several meanings as previously shown, and they will
be determined by the context.
Compromise is another word that can have several meanings. When used as a
noun, it means an agreement that is achieved after everyone involved accepts
less than what they wanted at first. However, this word can also be a verb that is
used with two different meanings:

to compromise = to reach an agreement in which everyone involved


accepts less than what they wanted at first
chegar a um consenso = chegar a um acordo no qual todos os envolvidos
aceitam menos do que eles queriam no começo

to compromise = to put someone or something at risk


comprometer = colocar alguém ou algo em risco

< voltar para o índice


91
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

The meaning will vary according to the context. Compare:

It’s not possible to reach a satisfactory agreement if people don’t compromise.


Não é possível chegar a um acordo satisfatório se as pessoas não chegarem a um consenso.

You may compromise your relationship if you don’t take it into consideration during a negotiation.
Você pode comprometer seu relacionamento se não o levar em consideração durante uma negociação.

In the first previous example, notice that the verb to compromise means the same as to
meet halfway, whereas in the second example it means to put something at risk.
The last previous sentence also presents a hypothetical situation that is introduced by if. In
this case, if could be replaced with when.
However, in some cases, when and if are not interchangeable. Observe:

If people worried less about their own interests, they would meet halfway.
Se as pessoas se preocupassem menos com seus próprios interesses, elas chegariam
a um meio-termo.

When people worried less about their own interests, they would meet halfway.

The condition is expressed in the simple past, worried, and the consequence is expressed
with the modal verb would. This tells us that this sentence states a hypothetical situation. In
this case, if and when are not interchangeable, because when cannot be used to introduce
situations that are not real.
There is another occasion in which when and if are not interchangeable.
Observe:

When will Bob sign the contract?


Quando Bob vai assinar o contrato?

If will Bob sign the contract?

< voltar para o índice


92
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

In this case, when is a question word used to ask about the moment at which
something happens. In this sentence it does not refer to a condition; hence, it
could not be replaced by if.
There is also an expression formed with when – since when – that cannot be
replaced by if, since it does not imply condition. Observe the following context:

Sara: You will not leave early if you do not deliver your tasks.
Sara: Você não vai sair mais cedo se não entregar suas tarefas.

Andrew: Oh yeah? And since when are you in charge around here?
Andrew: Ah, é? E desde quando você manda por aqui?

Notice that, in this context, since when is used to express surprise or anger. It is
often used in the interrogative form.
The word since on its own has other uses in different contexts. Take a look:

And since both consider the other party’s interest and not only their
own, none of them will feel let down.
E como ambas consideram o interesse da outra parte e não apenas o seu,
nenhuma delas se sentirá decepcionada.

In this sentence, since is being used to introduce a reason. In this context, it could
even be replaced by because.
In the same sentence, the word none means not one of a group of people.
Observe that here it says none of them. Them is a pronoun in the plural;
however, when you use the construction none of + plural, the following verb
should be conjugated in the singular. In this sentence, you cannot quite see this
because there is no change in conjugation according to the subject for modal
verbs such as will.
But you will see this clearly with the verb to be. Check it out:

None of my friends was hired in this company.


Nenhum dos meus amigos foi contratado nesta empresa.

< voltar para o índice


93
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

None of the pilots is willing to fly through the storm.


Nenhum dos pilotos está disposto a voar em meio à tempestade.

None of these cakes was bad. I liked them all.


Nenhum destes bolos estava ruim. Eu gostei de todos.

Whether it is conjugated in the simple past or the simple present, the verb is
supposed to be conjugated in its singular form when we use none followed by
plural.
Nonetheless, just as in every language, in English there are certain aspects
defined as grammatically correct that people tend to disregard more often than
not in everyday spoken language. This is the case of the verb that follows none
of + plural noun.
Take a look:

INFORMAL ENGLISH

None of these cakes were bad.


Nenhum desses bolos estava ruim.

Although the grammatical rule states that the verb must be in the singular,
you may hear this verb being used in the plural. Just bear in mind that this is
a colloquial, informal use of the language. It would be considered incorrect in
written or formal contexts.
Besides none, there are other words that we can use to refer to a group, such as
both and each:

both refers to two elements considered together


ambos(as) refere-se a dois elementos considerados em conjunto

each refers to two or more elements in a group considered separately


cada refere-se a dois ou mais elementos em um grupo, considerados
individualmente

< voltar para o índice


94
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Observe these words in a sentence and compare:

Compromise happens when each party gives in a little bit in order for
both of them to have their interests partially met.
Um consenso acontece quando cada parte cede um pouco para que ambas
tenham seus interesses parcialmente atendidos.

In the previous sentence, the word each refers to the noun party individually. The
word both refers to the two parties together.
Check out some more examples:

It’s a big house. Each bedroom has its own bathroom.


É uma casa grande. Cada quarto tem seu próprio banheiro.

In this sentence, the word each refers to the bedrooms individually. So even
though there may be several bedrooms in the house, the speaker refers to each
one individually. Each bedroom is the subject of the sentence, and because it
refers to an individual element, the verb that follows is conjugated in the third
person singular: has.
Now, with the word both:

This box is very heavy, you should hold it with both hands.
Esta caixa está muito pesada, você deveria segurá-la com ambas as mãos.

In the previous sentence, the word both refers to the noun hands, which is plural
and refers to two elements; two hands, in conjunction. There is no individual
distinction between these elements; they are seen as a unit of two things, so we
use the word both.
Now observe the words both and each used in the same context:

< voltar para o índice


95
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Michelle and Luke are my friends. Both are new parents. Each has a
way of taking care of the baby.
Michelle and Luke são meus amigos. Ambos são novos pais. Cada um tem
uma maneira de cuidar do bebê.

In this example, both and each refer to Michelle and Luke, the subject of the first
sentence, which consists of two people. In the next sentence, both replaces Michelle
and Luke as the subject of the sentence, and that is why the verb that follows is
conjugated in the third person plural: are. Finally, in the last sentence, each also
replaces Michelle and Luke as the subject, but since this word refers to them
individually, the verb that follows is conjugated in the third person singular: takes.

Now you know some ways of expressing


conditions. You also learned how to express
reason, some nouns and expressions to talk about
agreements, and words that you can use to refer
to elements in a group.

< voltar para o índice


96
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 3.

Activities
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.

( 1 ) ambas as partes ( 7 ) se ( ) relationship ( ) both parties

( 2 ) relacionamento ( 8 ) quando ( ) none ( ) both

( 3 ) chegar a um ( 9 ) realmente ( ) if ( ) as long as


meio-termo
( 10 ) reconhecer ( ) truly ( ) when
( 4 ) contanto que
( 11 ) ser contratado ( ) to be hired ( ) each
( 5 ) nenhum
( 12 ) ambos ( ) to acknowledge ( ) to meet halfway
( 6 ) cada

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words according to the translation.

Activity B – Answers

5. None / was/were
1. It’s a big house. bedroom has its own bathroom.

3. None / is
4. Both are
É uma casa grande. Cada quarto tem seu próprio banheiro.

1. Each

6. Each
2. This box is very heavy, you should hold it with hands. 2. both

Esta caixa está muito pesada, você deve segurá-la com ambas as mãos. 10. to acknowledge
11. to be hired

3. of the pilots willing to fly through the storm.


Nenhum dos pilotos está disposto a voar em meio à tempestade.
12. both
8. when
9. truly
7. if

4. Michelle and Luke are my friends. new parents.


Michelle e Luke são meus amigos. Ambos são novos pais.
Activity A – Answers

3. to meet halfway
1. both parties
2. relationship

4. as long as

5. of these cakes bad. I liked them all.


Nenhum destes bolos estava ruim. Eu gostei de todos.
5. none
6. each

6. Michelle and Luke are new parents. has a way of taking


care of the baby.
Michelle e Luke são novos pais. Cada um tem uma maneira de cuidar do bebê.

< voltar para o índice


97
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 4.

In the vocabulary part of this chapter, you learned a few more terms that can be used to introduce
a relationship of cause and consequence, or what is called conditionals. But for you to express
these relationships appropriately, you need to understand both their use and structure.
Overall, there are four main kinds of conditionals and each one of them will express a certain
degree of probability that a situation may happen. So far, you have seen three of those four kinds
of conditionals. Let’s review them.
The zero conditional is used to talk about a relationship of cause and consequence based on
general or predictable facts. As a result, these will show a high probability of occurrence. Both the
cause and the consequence will be presented in the simple present.
Observe:

ZERO CONDITIONAL

IF-CLAUSE / CONDITIONAL CLAUSE MAIN CLAUSE


Cause/Condition Consequence
Causa/Condição Consequência

If + simple present Simple present

If you want to hire a service for 150 dollars and you are charged 200 dollars, you
negotiate and compromise on 175 dollars.
Se você quer contratar um serviço por 150 dólares e cobram 200 dólares, vocês negociam e
chegam a um consenso de 175 dólares.

If you want to have a deadline in two days and your co-worker wants it in four days,
you compromise on a three-day deadline.
Se você quer ter um prazo de dois dias e seu colega quer um de quatro dias, vocês chegam
em um consenso de um prazo de três dias.

In both sentences, the if-clauses or conditional clauses are introduced by the conjunction if.
The situation is presented with verbs that are conjugated in the simple present. The main
clauses, which appear after the comma, are also in the simple present. This constitutes the zero
conditional.

< voltar para o índice


98
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

But as you have seen, the if-clause can also be introduced by when in such cases. Observe:

ZERO CONDITIONAL

When you want to have a deadline in two days and your co-worker wants it in four
days, you compromise on a three-day deadline.
Quando você quer ter um prazo de dois dias e seu colega quer um de quatro dias, vocês
chegam em um consenso de um prazo de três dias.

When does not refer to a moment in time in this sentence. The verbs of the conditional
clause, which is introduced by when, are in the simple present: want and wants. After
the comma, the main clause presents the consequence also in the simple present:
compromise, a word that in this sentence is a verb, not a noun.
You have also seen the first conditional, which is used to talk about situations with a high
probability of happening in the future. Observe:

FIRST CONDITIONAL

IF-CLAUSE / CONDITIONAL CLAUSE MAIN CLAUSE


Cause/Condition Consequence
Causa/Condição Consequência

If + simple present Modal verb will + verb

If all parties in a negotiation only care about their personal goals, there will be
no agreement whatsoever.
Se todas as partes em uma negociação somente se importarem com os seus
objetivos pessoais, não haverá nenhum tipo de acordo.

There will be no agreement whatsoever if all parties in a negotiation only care


about their personal goals.
Não haverá nenhum tipo de acordo se todas as partes em uma negociação somente
se importarem com os seus objetivos pessoais.

< voltar para o índice


99
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

The if-clause is introduced by the conjunction if, and the cause or condition is in
the simple present: care. However, the main clause is presented with the modal
verb will, which is used to express a future consequence that sometimes sounds
inevitable. That’s why we can say that will conveys an idea of inevitability.
Note that it is possible to invert the main clause and the if-clause, and there
will no longer be a comma separating both clauses: they will be linked by the
conjunction, which in this case is if. That being said, the if-clause will still be in
the simple present, and the main clause will continue to be formed with a modal
verb and the main verb in its base form.
It is also possible to talk about a consequence in the negative form; observe:

FIRST CONDITIONAL – MODAL VERB WILL


Negative Form

If people completely disregard the relationship and merely focus on


their objectives, the outcome of the negotiation will not be positive.
Se as pessoas desconsiderarem completamente o relacionamento e se
concentrarem somente em seus objetivos, o resultado da negociação não
será positivo.

The if-clause is in the affirmative form, and the main verbs are in the simple
present: disregard and focus. The main clause, however, is in the negative form
and follows the basic structure of the negative form of modal verbs: subject +
modal verb + not + main verb in the base form + complement. The subject is
the outcome of the negotiation, the modal verb is will, followed by not, the main
verb is be, which is in its base form, and the complement is the adjective positive.
So, in this sentence, we are talking about something that has a high probability of
not happening.
However, the first conditional is not exclusively formed with the modal verb will.
If we want to imply an idea of expectation or probability, we will use the modal
verbs should or may instead of will. The structure of the first conditional will
remain the same, but the modal verb will vary according to the idea of probability
we want to convey.
For example:

< voltar para o índice


100
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

FIRST CONDITIONAL

IF-CLAUSE / CONDITIONAL CLAUSE MAIN CLAUSE


Cause/Condition Consequence
Causa/Condição Consequência

If + simple present Modal verb should + verb

If both parties acknowledge that the relationship and the objectives have equal
importance, they should reach a compromise.
Se ambas as partes reconhecerem que o relacionamento e os objetivos têm igual
importância, elas devem chegar a um consenso.

The verbs in the if-clause in this sentence are in the simple present: acknowledge and
have, conjugated in the third person plural. This is the cause or condition. After the
comma, the consequence is presented according to the basic affirmative structure of
modal verbs; however, the modal verb here is should. This sentence does not refer to an
inevitability, but to something that is expected or assumed to happen in the future.
Now let’s see an example using may, a modal verb that conveys the idea of probability:

FIRST CONDITIONAL

MAIN CLAUSE IF-CLAUSE / CONDITIONAL CLAUSE


Consequence Cause/Condition
Consequência Causa/Condição

Modal verb may + verb If + simple present

Things may go south if only one party gives in and the other one doesn’t.
As coisas podem dar errado se apenas uma parte ceder, e a outra, não.
É provável que as coisas deem errado se apenas uma parte ceder, e a outra, não.

In this sentence, the clauses are inverted: the main clause, which is formed with the modal
verb may, is at the beginning. It follows the basic structure of the affirmative form of the
modal verbs, and it conveys an idea of probability. This means that the consequence has
a probability of happening in the future. The if-clause is linked to the main clause by the
conjunction if, and the verbs in it are in the simple present.
There is another modal verb that we can use in this situation: can. It conveys an idea of
possibility. And just as the other modal verbs, it follows the basic structure of sentence formation.

< voltar para o índice


101
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Let’s see a sentence with can expressing possibility:

FIRST CON DITIONAL

MAIN CLAUSE IF-CLAUSE / CONDITIONAL CLAUSE


Consequence Cause/Condition
Consequência Causa/Condição

Modal verb can + verb If + simple present

Things can go south if only one party gives in and the other one doesn’t.
As coisas podem dar errado se apenas uma parte ceder, e a outra, não.
É possível que as coisas deem errado se apenas uma parte ceder, e a outra, não.

Things can’t go south if both parties keep their relationship in mind.


As coisas não podem dar errado se ambas as partes têm em mente o seu
relacionamento.

In both examples the clauses are as follows: the main clause appears first,
followed by the if-clause, introduced by the connector if. Observe that both
conditions are expressed in the simple present.
In the first sentence, the main clause is formed with the modal verb can, and it
refers to something that has a possibility of happening in the future. There’s a
possibility that things will go south.
On the other hand, in the second sentence, the modal verb can is in its contracted
negative form: can’t. This means that the main clause refers to something that
has no possibility of happening. In other words: it is not possible for things to go
wrong provided that both parties keep their relationship in mind.
In a nutshell: the zero conditional is used to talk of a predictable, realistic
relationship of cause and consequence. The first conditional, on the other hand,
is used to talk about the real probability of something happening in the future.
And last, but not least, there is also the second conditional, which is used to
express an imaginary, unreal condition; therefore, its consequence is very
unlikely to happen. It follows the same if-clause + main clause structure,
but you will use the simple past to describe the imaginary condition, and the
consequence will generally be expressed with would.
Check it out:

< voltar para o índice


102
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

SE COND CONDITIONAL

IF-CLAUSE / CONDITIONAL CLAUSE MAIN CLAUSE


Cause/Condition Consequence
Causa/Condição Consequência

If + simple past Modal verb would + verb

If we hired more people, we would finish the project on time.


Se nós contratássemos mais pessoas, terminaríamos o projeto a tempo.

The if-clause, which begins with if, introduces an imaginary cause or condition:
hired, the verb to hire in the simple past. Therefore, the consequence is
imaginary, and it is presented by the main clause, which is formed by the basic
structure of the affirmative form with the modal verb would. This modal verb
conveys a sense of a past expectation.
Observe the next example:

SE COND CONDITIONAL – MODAL VERB WOULD

If I were you, I would open my own company.


Se eu fosse você, abriria minha própria empresa.

The previous example refers to imaginary or unreal scenarios: it is not possible


to actually be someone else, so this is a hypothesis, followed by a completely
imaginary consequence, described with the modal verb would. Observe that
even though the subject of the sentence is the first person singular I, the verb to
be is still conjugated as were. This happens because, in the second conditional,
the verb to be is conjugated as were for all subjects when used in the conditional
clause.
Check out one more example:

SE COND CONDITIONAL – MODAL VERB WOULD

If we weren’t at the office, we would watch a movie.


Se nós não estivéssemos no escritório, assistiríamos a um filme.

< voltar para o índice


103
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

This example also refers to an imaginary situation, but in the negative form of the simple past:
weren’t. The consequence is in the basic structure of the affirmative form of modal verbs, and it
refers to a hypothetical consequence.
So, would expresses an imaginary or unlikely consequence in a hypothetical scenario. There is
yet another modal verb that we could use in these situations: could. This modal verb conveys
the idea of possibility.
Take a look:

SE COND CONDITIONAL

IF-CLAUSE / CONDITIONAL CLAUSE MAIN CLAUSE


Cause/Condition Consequence
Causa/Condição Consequência

If + simple past Modal verb could + verb

If we hired more people, we could finish the project on time.


Se nós contratássemos mais pessoas, poderíamos terminar o projeto a tempo.

If I were you, I could open my own company.


Se eu fosse você, eu poderia abrir a minha própria empresa.

If we were at the office, we couldn’t watch a movie.


Se nós estivéssemos no escritório, não poderíamos assistir a um filme.

In the first two sentences, the if-clauses are in the simple past, thus presenting an imaginary scenario. The
consequence, however, is presented with the basic structure of the affirmative form of modal verbs: could. It
implies that it would be a possible outcome in this imaginary situation.
In the third sentence, the main clause is formed with the basic structure of the negative form of modal verbs:
couldn’t. This is the contracted form of could not, and it indicates an impossibility of something happening in
an imaginary future.

In this chapter, you learned three kinds of conditionals. You also saw
the possible ideas we may convey with the modal verbs can and could
in such sentences. If you want to learn more about these topics, you
can refer to the Grammar Guide section at the end of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Conditionals Page 191


Modal Verb Can Page 203
Modal Verb Could Page 206
Simple Past – Other Verbs Page 243
< voltar para o índice Simple Present – Other Verbs Page 254
104
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 5.

Activities
A. Write (a) for predictable or general facts; (b) for hypothetical situations likely to occur; and (c)
for imaginary situations unlikely to occur.

1. ( ) If I were you, I could open my own company.


Se eu fosse você, eu poderia abrir minha própria empresa.

2. ( ) Things can go south if only one party gives in and the other one doesn’t.
As coisas podem dar errado se apenas uma parte cede, e a outra, não.

3. ( ) If we hired more people, we would finish the project on time.


Se nós contratássemos mais pessoas, terminaríamos o projeto a tempo.

4. ( ) If both parties acknowledge that the relationship and the objectives have equal importance,
they should reach a compromise.
Se ambas as partes reconhecerem que o relacionamento e os objetivos têm igual importância, elas
deveriam chegar a um consenso.

5. ( ) If you want to have a deadline in two days and your co-worker wants it in four days, you
compromise on a three-day deadline.
Se você quer ter um prazo de dois dias e seu colega quer um de quatro dias, vocês chegam em um
consenso de um prazo de três dias.

6. ( ) If I were you, I would open my own company.


Se eu fosse você, abriria minha própria empresa.

7. ( ) You may compromise your relationship if you don’t take it into consideration during a
negotiation.
Você pode comprometer seu relacionamento se não o levar em consideração durante uma negociação.

8. ( ) If we were at the office, we couldn’t watch a movie.


Se nós estivéssemos no escritório, não poderíamos assistir a um filme.

< voltar para o índice


105
Chapter 4 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

B. Fill in the blanks with the missing words according to the translation.

1. If I were you, I my own company.


Se eu fosse você, abriria minha própria empresa.

2. If all parties in a negotiation only care about their personal goals, an


agreement whatsoever.
Se todas as partes em uma negociação somente se importarem com os seus objetivos pessoais, não
haverá nenhum tipo de acordo.

3. If we hired more people, we the project on time.


Se nós contratássemos mais pessoas, terminaríamos o projeto a tempo.

4. If people completely disregard the relationship and merely focus on their objectives, the outcome of
the negotiation positive.
Se as pessoas desconsiderarem completamente o relacionamento e se concentrarem somente em seus
objetivos, o resultado da negociação não será positivo.

5. If we hired more people, we the project on time.


Se nós contratássemos mais pessoas, poderíamos terminar o projeto a tempo.

6. If we weren’t at the office, we a movie.


Se nós não estivéssemos no escritório, assistiríamos a um filme.

3. would finish 8. ( c ) 4. ( b )
6. would watch there won’t be 7. ( b ) 3. ( b )
5. could finish 2. there will not be / 6. ( c ) 2. ( a )
4. will not be / won’t be 1. would open 5. ( a ) 1. ( c )
Activity B – Answers Activity A – Answers

< voltar para o índice


106
5
Relationships
Relationships
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 1.

In this chapter, you will learn how to make comparisons and form words with
suffixes, and also some elements of coherence and cohesion. You will also see
some important vocabulary and grammar topics to make it happen.
Now look at the script of Relationships.

REL ATIONSHIPS

In the last episode, we learned that once both parties are aware that
they should care not only about their interests but also their relationship,
we can reach a compromise, which is an outcome way better than a
lose-lose or even a win-lose situation.

Still, it’s not a win-win. In a compromise, none of the parties have their
interests fully met.

But can it get any better than that? Could we possibly have two
opposing interests fully met and also improve the relationship between
the parties?

Yes, this is possible, and we are on our way to get there. But walking
this path takes a lot of effort, dedication, care, and a thorough
understanding of the key aspects of a negotiation.

We’ll start by going deeper into the relationship aspect.

When negotiating with people we have a well-established relationship


with—those we love and care about—it’s easy to see the importance of
focusing on the relationship.

In fact, as we’ve seen, the fear of harming relationships we cherish


might lead us to give up our objectives or even prevent us from starting
to negotiate.

But what if we are negotiating with people we barely know and may
never meet again? Should we still focus on the relationship?

Take some time to think.

< voltar para o índice


108
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

An intriguing question, isn’t it? It would be a perfectly logical train of


thought— “in such a situation, we should not focus on the relationship.”
Allow me to rephrase the question:

Would you like to have any kind of relationship with any person
whatsoever who does not truly listen to your point of view, who just
can’t put themselves in your shoes and understand what you are going
through and why you want to go some other way? A person who looks
at you as a competitor and wants to beat you rather than collaborate—
wouldn’t you feel disrespected, to say the least?

Focusing on the relationship means to respect the other person’s


feelings and point of view as much as you want to have yours
respected. It’s to understand that everyone deserves respect and,
above all, that every interaction we have with other people is a real
chance to develop meaningful relationships. Ultimately, negotiations are
interactions among people.

When we understand that, we can also understand that the world


can be a better place if people respect each other, if we look at
interactions as ways to strengthen our ties with other people. Successful
negotiations improve existing relationships.

So, what if you don’t have a well-established relationship with your


neighbor or insurance broker? When you fully understand the key
aspects of negotiations, any chance you have to negotiate with them
will also be a chance to get closer, bond, improve the relationship, and
eventually become great friends.

REL ACIONAMENTOS

No último episódio, aprendemos que uma vez que ambas as partes


estão cientes de que elas devem se importar não apenas com seus
interesses, mas também com seu relacionamento, podemos chegar a
um consenso, que é um resultado muito melhor do que uma situação
perde-perde ou até ganha-perde.

Ainda assim, não é um ganha-ganha. Em um consenso, nenhuma das


partes tem seus interesses plenamente atendidos.

< voltar para o índice


109
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Mas pode ficar melhor do que isso? Nós poderíamos, possivelmente,


ter dois interesses opostos plenamente atendidos e também melhorar o
relacionamento entre as partes?

Sim, isso é possível, e vamos chegar lá. Mas trilhar esse caminho
requer muito esforço, dedicação, cuidado e uma compreensão total dos
principais aspectos de uma negociação.

Vamos começar nos aprofundando na questão do relacionamento.

Quando negociamos com pessoas com quem temos um relacionamento


bem estabelecido — que amamos e com as quais nos importamos — é
fácil ver a importância de focar no relacionamento.

Na verdade, como vimos, o medo de prejudicar relacionamentos que


prezamos pode nos levar a desistir dos nossos objetivos ou até mesmo
nos impedir de começar a negociar.

Mas e se estivermos negociando com pessoas que nós mal conhecemos


e que talvez nunca mais encontraremos? Ainda devemos nos concentrar
no relacionamento?

Tire um tempo para pensar.

Uma pergunta intrigante, não é? Seria uma linha de raciocínio


perfeitamente lógica: "em tal situação, não deveríamos focar no
relacionamento." Permita-me reformular a pergunta:

Você gostaria de ter qualquer tipo de relacionamento com qualquer


pessoa que não ouça de verdade o seu ponto de vista, que
simplesmente não consegue se colocar no seu lugar e entender o que
você está passando e por que você quer ir por outro caminho? Uma
pessoa que te vê como um concorrente e quer ganhar de você ao invés
de colaborar — você não se sentiria desrespeitado, para dizer o mínimo?

Focar no relacionamento significa respeitar os sentimentos e o ponto de


vista da outra pessoa tanto quanto você quer ter os seus respeitados.
É entender que todos merecem respeito e, acima de tudo, que cada
interação com outras pessoas é uma chance real de desenvolver
relacionamentos significativos — no fim das contas, negociações são
interações entre pessoas.

< voltar para o índice


110
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Quando entendemos isso, também podemos entender que o mundo


pode ser um lugar melhor se as pessoas se respeitarem, se olharmos
para as interações como formas de fortalecer nossos laços com outras
pessoas. Negociações bem sucedidas melhoram relacionamentos
existentes.

E aí? E se você não tem um relacionamento bem estabelecido com seu


vizinho ou corretor de seguros? Quando você entende plenamente os
principais aspectos das negociações, qualquer chance que você tiver de
negociar com eles também será uma oportunidade para se aproximar,
criar laços, melhorar o relacionamento e, por fim, se tornarem ótimos
amigos.

< voltar para o índice


111
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 2.

Is it enough to come to a consensus or to reach a compromise to achieve a


partially satisfactory result at the end of a negotiation, and, with that, avoid
damage to the relationship? Or is it possible to get exactly what we want from it
without damaging our relationship with the other party?
In this chapter, you will delve deeper into the answer to those questions, but for
that, let's go over some of what we have seen so far. Take a look:

Once both parties are aware that they should care not only about their
interests but also their relationship, we can reach a compromise, which
is an outcome way better than a lose-lose or even a win-lose situation.
Uma vez que ambas as partes estão cientes de que elas devem se importar
não apenas com seus interesses, mas também com seu relacionamento,
podemos chegar a um consenso, que é um resultado muito melhor do que
uma situação perde-perde ou até ganha-perde.

The first word in this sentence, once, has different meanings and uses; here, it
means from the moment something happens, and it could be replaced by when
or even as soon as.
This sentence establishes a parallel between caring about interests and the
relationship in a negotiation with the use of not only… but also. This construction
is used to present two related pieces of information.
This sentence also makes a comparison by using the adjective better, which is
the comparative form of good. Look at it in another sentence:

Some people think that cold pizza is better than hot pizza.
Algumas pessoas acham que pizza fria é melhor do que pizza quente.

There are two elements being compared here: cold pizza and hot pizza. And the
adjective that compares them is better. Note that it is followed by than.
Now, saying that one thing is better than another is different from saying that
one thing is the best of all. Check it out:

< voltar para o índice


112
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

I think pizza is the best dish there is.


Eu acho que pizza é o melhor prato que existe.

Note that you are no longer comparing one thing with another of the same type.
Here, you are saying that pizza is the best dish compared to all the other dishes
that exist. So, in this case, you are using the superlative form.
Adjectives in English are invariable; they do not change according to number or
gender, even if they are in the superlative form. Compare the following examples:

Audrey Hepburn was the best choice for the movie “Funny Face”.
Audrey Hepburn foi a melhor escolha para o filme “Cinderela em Paris”.

Al Pacino was the best actor in 1993.


Al Pacino foi o melhor ator em 1993.

The subject of the first sentence, Audrey Hepburn, refers to a woman. In the
second sentence, the subject is Al Pacino, a man. In English, adjectives do not
change according to gender. Note that the superlative the best is used in both
sentences to say that these people were at the highest level.
Adjectives do not change according to number either, so the same adjective can
be used to refer to singular or plural nouns.
Back to the topic of negotiations, so far you have seen two possible outcomes:
win-lose, in which one party loses, and lose-lose, when both parties lose. And
these losses regard not only the objectives, but also the relationship.
Before such a situation, a question is raised:

Could we possibly have two opposing interests fully met and also
improve the relationship between the parties?
Nós poderíamos, possivelmente, ter dois interesses opostos plenamente
atendidos e também melhorar o relacionamento entre as partes?

This sentence states a possibility. The modal verb could implies a possibility, and
it is reinforced by the adverb possibly, which is formed by the adjective possible
+ -LY. There are other adverbs that can be used to imply possibility, such as
maybe and perhaps.

< voltar para o índice


113
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Fully is also an adverb, formed by the adjective full and the suffix -LY. But it does
not imply possibility. Fully is synonymous with completely, which is also formed
from an adjective, which is complete, plus the suffix -LY.
Another interesting word in the previous sentence is between. In this context,
between indicates that both parties are connected by their relationship – it is a
relationship between one and the other.
But we can also use the word between to make comparisons. Check this out:

Jack is a maestro, and he says that the difference between good music
and really good music is a good instrument and also a talented musician.
Jack é um maestro e ele diz que a diferença entre boa música e música
realmente boa é um bom instrumento e também um músico talentoso.

This sentence uses the word between to state that two elements are different
from one another. Since we have been pointing out adverbs, there is another one
in this sentence, formed by the adjective real and the suffix -LY: really. As you
can see, this adverb is used for emphasis, and it intensifies the adjective good in
this case.
There is an element of cohesion in this sentence: and also, which is used to add
extra information to something that has already been said.
So, back to the question about the possibility of reaching objectives and at the
same time improving the relationship, it becomes essential to understand the role
of relationships in negotiations.

We’ll start by going deeper into the relationship aspect.


Vamos começar indo mais fundo na questão do relacionamento.

Deeper is a comparative adjective. It is formed from the adjective deep, which


means profound. The opposite of deep, in this context, would be superficial.
Notice that here, deeper emphasizes the phrasal verb to go into, which means to
discuss a subject in detail. So, to go deeper into a topic means to study or discuss
it thoroughly.
It is not difficult to understand the importance of the relationship when we
negotiate with people we know and like. Sometimes, it is even more likely that we
give up on something that we want in order to maintain our relationships.

< voltar para o índice


114
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

But there is also the other way around:

What if we are negotiating with people we barely know and may never meet again?
Should we still focus on the relationship? An intriguing question, isn’t it? It would be
a perfectly logical train of thought – “in such a situation, we should not focus on the
relationship.”
E se estivermos negociando com pessoas que nós mal conhecemos e que talvez nunca mais
encontraremos. Uma pergunta intrigante, não é? Seria uma linha de raciocínio perfeitamente
lógica – “em tal situação, não deveríamos focar no relacionamento.”

In the previous sentence, there is the expression train of thought, which means a line of reasoning,
the way someone reaches a conclusion or thinks about something. Notice that the word intriguing
ends in -ING. However, it is an adjective, not a verb, and it means fascinating. From this adjective,
you can form the adverb intriguingly, which means interestingly, surprisingly. You just need
to add the suffix -LY to it. The same happened to the adjective perfect, from which the adverb
perfectly was formed. Note that perfectly intensifies the adjective logical.
Adverbs are commonly used for emphasis. For instance, the adverb truly, which is formed by
the word true + the suffix -LY. It loses the silent -E at the end and becomes truly. Look at it in a
sentence:

Would you like to have any kind of relationship with any person whatsoever who does
not truly listen to your point of view, who just can’t put themselves in your shoes and
understand what you are going through and why you want to go some other way?
Você gostaria de ter qualquer tipo de relacionamento com qualquer pessoa que seja que não
ouça de verdade o seu ponto de vista, que simplesmente não consegue se colocar no seu
lugar e entender o que você está passando e por que você quer ir por outro caminho?

There is yet another adverb in the previous example: just, which has the same meaning as simply,
another adverb formed by an adjective and the suffix -LY: simple + -LY.
There are some interesting constructions with the verb to go in the previous sentence as well.
To go another way is an expression, it does not mean to physically go somewhere, but to make
a different choice. We also have the phrasal verb to go through, which here means to endure, to
suffer.
There are two interesting expressions in this sentence. One of them is point of view, which is the
same as perspective, or standpoint. The other one is to put yourself in someone else’s shoes.
This expression is not to be taken literally; it means to imagine yourself in the same situation or
circumstance as someone else and understand or empathize with their perspective.

< voltar para o índice


115
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

There is a similar expression; look:

You shouldn’t judge until you walked a mile in someone else’s shoes.
Você não deve julgar até passar pelo que alguém passou.

This means that before judging someone, you must understand their experience
and standpoint.
It would be quite hard in the long run to keep a relationship with someone
who does not put themselves in our shoes. It would be much nicer to negotiate
with a person who cares about keeping a good relationship and has a sense of
collaboration. Let’s paint an opposite picture here:

A person who looks at you as a competitor and wants to beat you rather
than collaborate – wouldn’t you feel disrespected, to say the least?
Uma pessoa que te vê como um concorrente e quer ganhar de você ao invés
de colaborar – você não se sentiria desrespeitado, para dizer o mínimo?

It is worth mentioning that, in this context, the verb to beat means to defeat
someone, as in a competition. In a different context, it can mean to physically hit
someone. Notice an element of cohesion: rather than, which means the same
as instead of. It suggests a substitution of one situation for another. In this case,
competition takes the place of collaboration.
Notice that we have yet another example of the superlative form in this sentence:
the least. It is the superlative form of the adjective little. To say the least is an
expression that suggests the situation is a lot more serious than it is being said.
There is another way to make a comparison, which is by using as much as. This
expression compares two elements that are of equal importance. Look at the
following sentence:

Focusing on the relationship means to respect the other person’s feelings


and point of view as much as you want to have yours respected.
Focar no relacionamento significa respeitar os sentimentos e o ponto de vista
da outra pessoa tanto quanto você quer ter os seus respeitados.

As you can see, as much as establishes that two elements are equally considered.
Negotiations do not have to be a time of tension. Instead, they are an opportunity to
develop a relationship based on respect.

< voltar para o índice


116
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

And that is because:

Ultimately, negotiations are interactions among people.


No fim das contas, negociações são interações entre pessoas.

Note in the previous example that the adverb ultimately means finally, the final
point or result. It can be replaced with at last. Among is a word used to talk
about relationships between people when they are considered a group of more
than two, whereas between refers to one-on-one interactions, in which the
elements are considered individually.
In short, when it comes to negotiations, it is essential to understand the
importance of relationships:

When you fully understand the key aspects of negotiations, any chance
you have to negotiate with them will also be a chance to get closer, to
bond, to improve the relationship, and eventually become great friends.
Quando você entende plenamente os principais aspectos das negociações,
qualquer chance que você tiver de negociar com eles também vai ser uma
oportunidade para se aproximar, criar laços, melhorar o relacionamento e,
por fim, se tornarem ótimos amigos.

The verb to bond is especially important when it comes to relationships. It means


to form connections with people, getting closer to them. Notice that there are two
adverbs in the example that share the same suffix in their formation – fully, which
is the same as completely and eventually, which means at some point.
Last but not least, it is important to mention that not every adverb will be
formed by adding the suffix -LY. This is the case with perhaps and maybe, for
example. Moreover, not every word that ends in -LY is an adverb. For example,
the adjective silly means foolish or lacking good sense. The adjective ugly is the
opposite of beautiful, and the word family is a noun.

Now you know how to form some adverbs using suffixes.


You’ve also learned some adjectives and several very
useful words to make comparisons.

< voltar para o índice


117
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 3.

Activities
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.

( 1 ) estar ciente ( 7 ) linha de raciocínio ( ) intriguing ( ) to bond

( 2 ) entre ( 8 ) julgar ( ) to judge ( ) possibly

( 3 ) possivelmente ( 9 ) passar ( ) fully ( ) to go through

( 4 ) plenamente ( 10 ) para dizer o ( ) to say the least ( ) to improve


mínimo
( 5 ) realmente ( ) really ( ) between
( 11 ) melhorar
( 6 ) intrigante ( ) to be aware ( ) train of thought
( 12 ) formar laços

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words according to the translation.

1. Could we have two opposing interests fully met and also improve the
relationship between the parties?
Nós poderíamos, possivelmente, ter dois interesses opostos plenamente atendidos e também melhorar
o relacionamento entre as partes?

2. , negotiations are interactions among people.


No fim das contas, negociações são interações entre pessoas.

3. When you understand the key aspects of negotiations, any chance you have
to negotiate with them…
Quando você entende plenamente os principais aspectos das negociações, qualquer chance que você
tem de negociar com eles...

4. …will also be a chance to get closer, to bond, to improve the relationship, and
become great friends.
...também vai ser uma chance de se aproximar, criar laços, melhorar o relacionamento e, por fim, se
tornarem ótimos amigos.

< voltar para o índice


118
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

5. An intriguing question, isn’t it? It would be a logical train of


thought – “in such a situation, we should not focus on the relationship.”
Uma pergunta intrigante, não é? Seria uma linha de raciocínio perfeitamente lógica – “em tal situação,
não deveríamos focar no relacionamento.”

6. Jack is a maestro, and he says that the difference between good music and
good music is a good instrument and also a talented musician.
Jack é um maestro e ele diz que a diferença entre boa música e música realmente boa é um bom
instrumento e também um músico talentoso.

6. really 12. to bond 6. intriguing


5. perfectly 11. to improve 5. really
4. eventually 10. to say the least 4. fully
3. fully 9. to go through 3. possibly
2. Ultimately 8. to judge 2. between
1. possibly 7. train of thought 1. to be aware
Activity B – Answers Activity A – Answers

< voltar para o índice


119
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 4.

In the vocabulary part of this chapter, you studied words and ways of making
comparisons. You also saw several interesting adjectives and adverbs. Let’s delve
deeper into this subject, but, before that, it is important to establish the difference
between an adverb and an adjective.
Take a look:

ADJE CTIVES AND ADVERBS

Adjective qualifies a noun


Adjetivo qualifica um substantivo

Adverb qualifies an adjective, a verb, or an adverb


Advérbio qualifica um adjetivo, um verbo ou um advérbio

As you can see, adjectives and adverbs qualify different types of words.
Let’s take a look at how that applies in sentences. Observe:

ADJE CTIVES

Sophie is a good swimmer; the pool is deep.


Sophie é uma boa nadadora, a piscina é funda.

The word good refers to a noun, swimmer, so it is an adjective. Deep qualifies the noun
pool, it is also an adjective.
Now take a look at an example of a sentence with an adverb:

ADVERBS

Michael drove so perfectly; he passed his driving test on his first try.
Michael dirigiu tão perfeitamente, ele passou o teste de direção na primeira tentativa.

< voltar para o índice


120
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Perfectly does not qualify Michael, which is a proper noun, or driving test or
even try, all nouns. Perfectly qualifies the way in which he drove, so it qualifies a
verb; thus, it is an adverb.
But using an adjective or an adverb is not an either-or situation. We can use both
in the same sentence.
For example:

ADJE CTIVES AND ADVERBS

You are experienced negotiators; you calmly addressed the negotiation


and got a very good deal for both sides.
Vocês são negociadores experientes; vocês abordaram a negociação
calmamente e conseguiram um acordo muito bom para ambos os lados.

The word experienced refers to a noun, negotiators; hence, it is an adjective.


Calmly refers to a verb, addressed, so it is an adverb. And good refers to the
noun deal, so it is an adjective.
As you have already seen, adverbs are usually formed with the suffix -LY. For
example, calmly is formed by adding the suffix -LY to the adjective calm. In this
case, we simply added the suffix, with no change to the radical of the word. But
sometimes, there will be differences in spelling.
So, let’s check out the rules for adverb formation by adding the suffix -LY:
Words ending in L get a double L before adding Y. For example: beautiful
becomes beautifully; careful becomes carefully.
But if it already finishes in double L, we just add Y. For instance, the adjective
full becomes fully.
In words ending in consonant + LE, we remove the E and add Y in its place. For
example: the adjective simple becomes simply. The adjective possible becomes
possibly.
For words with more than one syllable ending in Y, we remove the Y and
replace it with the letter I, so we have -ILY at the end. For instance: the adjective
steady becomes steadily. Angry becomes angrily.
However, for words with a single syllable ending with Y, we generally add -LY.
For example, the adjective shy becomes shyly.

< voltar para o índice


121
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

ADVERB FORMATION
SUFFIX -LY

Adjective Adverb

full fully
pleno(a) plenamente

simple simply
simples simplesmente

possible possibly
possível possivelmente

steady steadily
estável estavelmente

shy shyly
tímido(a) timidamente

But watch out. There are exceptions. For example, the noun day ends in vowel +
Y, but it escapes the rule, becoming daily.

ADVERB FORMATION
SUFFIX -LY

Noun Adverb
day daily
dia diariamente

Now, not every adverb will end with -LY. One more thing: not all words that end
with -LY are adverbs. For example, silly is an adjective that means foolish. There
is also the word ugly, which ends in -LY but is an adjective. The word family,
which is a noun. There are several cases like these, so be careful. You cannot
really generalize things when it comes to languages.

< voltar para o índice


122
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Now that you know a bit about adverbs, let’s take a look at adjectives. In addition to qualifying
a noun, adjectives can also be used to make comparisons between two or more elements.
And to do that, you will use the comparative form.
When you are using long adjectives, which in general have more than five letters or more
than one syllable, to compare something, you will say more + adjective + than. Take a look at
these examples:

ADJE CTIVES – COMPARATIVE FORM


Long Adjectives

MORE + ADJECTIVE + THAN

In order to prioritize, it is vital to understand that some tasks are more important
than others.
Para priorizar, é vital entender que algumas tarefas são mais importantes do que outras.

Jenny cried because she thought her sister’s bicycle was more beautiful than hers.
Jenny chorou porque ela achou que a bicicleta da sua irmã era mais bonita do que a dela.

Now, for short adjectives, which generally have one syllable or less than five letters, you will
not use more, you will form the comparison with the suffix -ER, and you will continue using
than. Take a look:

ADJE CTIVES – COMPARATIVE FORM


Short Adjectives

ADJECTIVE ENDING IN -ER + THAN

Cars nowadays are faster than fifty years ago.


Hoje em dia os carros são mais rápidos do que há cinquenta anos.

To some people, working directly with the public is way nicer than working in an office.
Para algumas pessoas, trabalhar diretamente com o público é bem mais agradável do que
trabalhar em um escritório.

The comparative form is commonly used when you are comparing one element with another.

< voltar para o índice


123
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

But there is also the superlative form. It is used to make a comparison between one element
and all of the other elements in the same group. That is, it will be used to say that, within a
group, this element stands out.
The superlative form will also have two different structures: one for short adjectives and
another one for long adjectives. But they have one thing in common: the word than will not be
used because you are not going to make a comparison between two elements.
For long adjectives, you will say the most + adjective. Take a look:

ADJE CTIVES – SUPERL ATIVE FORM


Long Adjectives

THE MOST + ADJECTIVE

Anthony is the most experienced negotiator in the team.


Anthony é o negociador mais experiente da equipe.

The most important aspect of a good business relationship is mutual respect.


O aspecto mais importante de um bom relacionamento de negócios é respeito mútuo.

For short adjectives, you are going to add the suffix -EST to the end of the word.
Take a look:

ADJE CTIVES – SUPERL ATIVE FORM


Short Adjectives

ADJECTIVE ENDING IN -EST

The hardest job to do is the one you don’t like.


O trabalho mais difícil de se fazer é aquele de que você não gosta.

Michelle went to such a fancy restaurant, but she said it was the
smallest meal of her life.
Michelle foi a um restaurante tão chique, mas ela disse que foi a menor
refeição da vida dela.

Now, an important note: in both comparative and superlative forms, there are
irregular adjectives that will have different constructions. As they are irregular,
by definition they do not follow a rule in their formation. There are not many,
for most adjectives are considered regular. Here are the most common ones:

< voltar para o índice


124
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

COMPARATIVE AND SUPERL ATIVE FORM


Irregular Adjectives

Adjective Comparative Superlative

good better the best


bom/boa melhor o/a melhor

bad worse the worst


mau/ruim pior o/a pior

Sometimes, a word in the comparative form can work both as an adjective and
as an adverb, depending on the element to which it refers. Have a look at these
sentences:

COMPARATIVE FORM

The pool at the gym is deeper than the pool at Michael’s house.
A piscina na academia é mais funda do que a piscina na casa do Michael.

In this sentence, the comparative deeper refers to the noun pool, so it is an


adjective.
However, deeper can also be an adverb. Check it out:

COMPARATIVE FORM

We’ll start by going deeper into the relationship aspect.


Nós vamos começar indo mais fundo na questão do relacionamento.

In this sentence, the comparative deeper is an adverb because it refers to a


phrasal verb – to go into.
There are other comparative forms that can work both as an adjective and as an
adverb. Compare the following examples:

< voltar para o índice


125
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

COMPARATIVE FORM

This athlete is so much faster than the others.


Este atleta é muito mais rápido do que os outros.

This athlete runs so much faster than the others.


Este atleta corre muito mais rápido do que os outros.

In the first example, the comparative faster refers to a noun: athlete, so it is an


adjective. It is used to make a comparison between one athlete and the others.
However, in the second sentence, faster refers to a verb, runs, so it is an adverb. Notice
that, in these last two sentences, much was used before the adjective and the adverb
for emphasis. In this sense, much is considered an intensifier.
Intensifiers are not grammatically essential to form sentences, but they add an extra
layer of meaning to the speech. Adverbs are commonly used as intensifiers. Check out
some examples:

INTENSIFIERS

Justin really wanted to hire Melanie, but his boss decided to go another way.
Justin realmente queria contratar Melanie, mas seu chefe decidiu seguir outro caminho.

In this sentence, really qualifies the verb wanted, giving it more intensity. It is not
essential to the understanding of the sentence, which would be correct without
the intensifier, but it would lose some in emphasis.
Look at another example:

INTENSIFIERS

Would you like to have any kind of relationship with any person
whatsoever that does not truly listen to your point of view?
Você gostaria de ter qualquer tipo de relacionamento com qualquer pessoa
que seja que não ouça de verdade o seu ponto de vista?

< voltar para o índice


126
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Whatsoever is the intensifier of any person, giving it a sense of any person at all.
Once again, although it is not essential to the sentence, this word gives it an extra
layer of meaning. The adverb truly works similarly, emphasizing the verb listen.
However, intensifiers do not necessarily have to be adverbs. Adjectives can work
as intensifiers as well.
For example:

INTENSIFIERS

This hotel room is so comfortable and beautiful; it’s a complete dream.


Este quarto de hotel é tão confortável e bonito; é um sonho completo.

Complete qualifies the noun dream, so it is an adjective. It emphasizes just how


dreamy the hotel room is.
A common intensifier is the word so; check it out:

INTENSIFIERS

This athlete runs so much faster than the others.


Este atleta corre tão mais rápido do que os outros.

So much intensifies the comparative adjective faster. It highlights just how much
faster this athlete is when compared to others.

In this chapter, you’ve learned the use of different adjectives and


adverbs. You’ve also learned how to make comparisons by using both
the superlative and comparative forms, as well as how to intensify
comparisons. If you want to learn more about these topics, you can
refer to the Grammar Guide section at the end of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Adjectives Page 180


Comparative Form Page 186
Superlative Form Page 270

< voltar para o índice


127
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 5.

Activities
A. Complete the chart with the correct form of the adjectives.

Adjective Comparative form Superlative form


good better 1.
nice 2. the nicest
important more important 3.
hard 4. the hardest
comfortable 5. the most comfortable
fast faster 6.
beautiful 7. the most beautiful
bad worse 8.

B. Fill in the blanks with the missing words according to the translation.

1. This hotel room is and , it’s a


complete dream.
Este quarto de hotel é tão confortável e bonito; é um sonho completo.

2. The pool at the gym is than the pool at Michael’s house.


A piscina na academia é mais funda do que a piscina na casa do Michael.

3. This athlete runs than the others.


Este atleta corre tão mais rápido do que os outros.

4. to do is the one you don’t like.


O trabalho mais difícil de se fazer é aquele de que você não gosta.

< voltar para o índice


128
Chapter 5 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

5. Michelle went to such a fancy restaurant, but she said it was of her life.
Michelle foi a um restaurante tão chique, mas ela disse que foi a menor refeição da vida dela.

6. In order to prioritize, it is vital to understand that some tasks are


than others.
Para priorizar, é vital entender que algumas tarefas são mais importantes do que outras.

8. the worst
7. more beautiful
6. more important 6. the fastest
5. the smallest meal 5. more comfortable
4. The hardest job 4. harder
3. so much faster 3. the most important
2. deeper 2. nicer
1. so comfortable / beautiful 1. the best
Activity B – Answers Activity A – Answers

< voltar para o índice


129
6
Objectives
Objectives
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 1.

In this chapter, you will learn different meanings and uses of the same word.
You will learn how to talk about skills and how to ask questions and formulate
answers about reasons. You will also see some important vocabulary and
grammar topics to make it happen.
Now look at the script of Objectives.

OBJE CTIVES

We’ve learned that to successfully complete our journey to win-


win outcomes, we need to deeply understand the key concepts of
a negotiation: to improve the relationship and fully meet all parties’
objectives.

But what are your objectives anyway?

To start digging into this concept, we first need to understand that


all objectives are solutions to problems — and I don’t mean only in
a negotiation. Our personal goals, the ones we might not even have
to negotiate with other people to achieve, are potential solutions for
problems we’ve identified at some point.

But do you know how to identify a problem? Are you able to recognize a
problem and tell it apart from its potential solutions?

Let’s imagine a situation: I’m all by myself, there are no drugstores


around, no delivery services, and I need a painkiller. What is my actual
problem?

Having no drugstores around?


No delivery service available?
Needing a painkiller?

Some will say I have several problems; others may say that needing
a painkiller is my actual problem because if I didn’t need it, the other
situations wouldn’t probably bother me.

It makes sense to assume that needing a painkiller is my problem.

< voltar para o índice


131
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

However, since there’s no way I can get it, it takes me to a dead end.

And whenever we get to a dead end, there is only one reasonable action:
to step back, which, in this case, means to start looking for reasons.

Why do I need a painkiller in the first place?

The answer to this question is how we start to isolate the problem from its
possible solutions—because I have a headache and I want to get rid of it.

“But who on earth would not be able to recognize a headache?” you may
be asking.

This is exactly what’s tricky about it. Most people have had headaches tons
of times, and, in most cases, the easiest way to get rid of them was to take
a painkiller. This is a solution we have used so many times that we end up
not realizing that this is not the real problem but just one possible solution.

If I can just take one step back and acknowledge that what I’m really
interested in is to get rid of a headache, I’ll be able to think of several
possibilities that do not involve taking a painkiller.

I may have a headache because I’m upset about something, or because


I’ve been reading in low light, or because I drank little water during the
day…and I could go on and on and on. But, by taking a step back, I can now
see that there’s a chance I could solve my problem by drinking some water,
quitting reading for a while, or even meditating.

The bottom line here is that we can easily be tricked into picking
immediate solutions, either because they have worked before or because
this is the only solution we can see, and then we inadvertently disguise
this one possible solution as our actual problem.

That’s what happens whenever two people want 10 dollars, and a


10-dollar bill is all they have available. When one person asks for a two-
week deadline, but the other says only one is possible. When one friend
wants to eat Japanese, and the other, Italian.

In all of these situations, we’ve failed to take a step back and ask why:
“Why do you need 10 dollars each?” “Why do you need a two-week
deadline?” “Why can you give me only one?” “Why do you want to have
Japanese or Italian?”

And by not asking why, we get stuck in a position in which we are


narrowed down to a single solution to our problem, whereas the actual
problem is to find out what we are really interested in. Interests are
different from positions.

< voltar para o índice


132
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

OBJE TIVOS

Nós aprendemos que para completar a nossa jornada rumo à


negociação ganha-ganha com sucesso, precisamos entender
profundamente os conceitos-chave de uma negociação: melhorar o
relacionamento e atender plenamente aos objetivos de todas as partes.

Mas quais são os seus objetivos, afinal?

Para começar a investigar este conceito, primeiro precisamos entender


que todos os objetivos são soluções para problemas — e não quero
dizer apenas em uma negociação. Nossos objetivos pessoais, aqueles
que talvez nem precisemos negociar com outras pessoas para alcançar,
são soluções potenciais para problemas que identificamos em algum
momento.

Mas você sabe como identificar um problema? Você é capaz de


reconhecer um problema e distingui-lo de suas soluções potenciais?

Vamos imaginar uma situação: estou sozinho, não há farmácias por


perto, nem serviços de entrega, e preciso de um analgésico. Qual é o
meu problema real?

Não ter farmácias por perto?


Nenhum serviço de entrega disponível?
Precisar de um analgésico?

Alguns dirão que tenho vários problemas; outros podem dizer que
precisar de um analgésico é o meu problema real, pois se eu não
precisasse, as outras situações provavelmente não me incomodariam.

Faz sentido supor que meu problema é precisar de um analgésico. No


entanto, já que não tenho como conseguir um, isso me leva a um beco
sem saída.

E sempre que chegamos a um beco sem saída, há apenas uma ação


razoável: recuar, o que, neste caso, significa começar a procurar por
motivos.

Por que eu sequer preciso de um analgésico?

A resposta para esta pergunta é como começamos a isolar o problema


de suas possíveis soluções — porque tenho uma dor de cabeça e quero
me livrar dela.

< voltar para o índice


133
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

“Mas quem neste mundo não seria capaz de reconhecer uma dor de
cabeça?” você pode estar pensando.

É exatamente isto que é complicado. Muitas pessoas tiveram dores de


cabeça inúmeras vezes, e, na maioria dos casos, a maneira mais fácil de
se livrar delas foi tomar um analgésico. Esta é uma solução que usamos
tantas vezes que acabamos não percebendo que este não é o problema
real, mas apenas uma solução possível.

Se eu puder recuar e reconhecer que meu real interesse é me livrar de


uma dor de cabeça, eu serei capaz de pensar em várias possibilidades
que não envolvam tomar um analgésico.

Eu posso estar com dor de cabeça por estar chateado com alguma
coisa, ou porque tenho lido com pouca luz, ou porque bebi pouca água
durante o dia... e por aí vai. Mas, ao dar um passo para trás, agora posso
ver que há uma chance de resolver o meu problema bebendo um pouco
de água, deixando de ler por um tempo, ou até meditando.

A questão aqui é que podemos facilmente ser induzidos a escolher


soluções imediatas, seja porque elas funcionaram antes, ou porque essa
é a única solução que conseguimos enxergar, e então, inadvertidamente
disfarçamos esta possível solução como nosso problema real.

Isso é o que acontece sempre que duas pessoas querem 10 dólares, e


uma nota de 10 dólares é tudo o que elas têm disponível. Quando uma
pessoa pede um prazo de duas semanas, mas a outra diz que apenas
uma é possível. Quando um amigo quer comida japonesa, e o outro,
italiana.

Em todas essas situações, falhamos em recuar e perguntar o por quê:


“Por que cada um de vocês precisa de 10 dólares?” “Por que você
precisa de um prazo de duas semanas?” “Por que você só pode me dar
uma?” “Por que você quer comida japonesa ou italiana?”

E ao não perguntar o porquê, ficamos presos a uma posição em


que estamos limitados a uma única solução para o nosso problema,
enquanto o problema real é descobrir o nosso interesse real. Os
interesses são diferentes das posições.

< voltar para o índice


134
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 2.

In the last two chapters, you learned a lot about the importance of the relationship
in negotiations and how they influence their results. In this chapter, you will see a
new aspect of negotiations: the importance of having a clear objective in mind.
Think about it:

What are your objectives anyway?


Quais são os seus objetivos, afinal?

In this sentence, anyway serves to emphasize the question being asked, to focus
on the most important aspect of the question, which in this case is the objectives
you have in a negotiation. This is a common spoken use of anyway.
But the word anyway has other uses and meanings. For instance, it can be used
to change the subject. Look at the following dialogue:

- Hi Mark! What’s up?


- Oi, Mark! E aí?

- Well, things are a bit complicated right now. But, anyway, how are
you doing?
- Bem, as coisas estão um pouco complicadas agora. Mas, de todo modo,
como está você?

In the dialogue, Mark begins to answer by saying that things are a bit complicated. But apparently, he
does not want to talk about it, so he changes the subject using anyway. This is another common use
of this word in spoken language.
What’s up is an informal question often used to greet someone and find out what is new. This is a
type of question that you cannot answer with yes or no, as it would make no sense. It is necessary to
respond within the context that is defined by the question word involved, in this case, what.
Context is also important when you need to understand different meanings of the same word. So far,
you have seen that anyway can be used for emphasis and to change topics.
But it can also be used to say one thing happened despite something else. In this case, anyway has a
similar meaning to nevertheless or regardless of.

< voltar para o índice


135
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Check it out:

It was raining. Mike and his friends played soccer anyway.


Estava chovendo. Mike e seus amigos jogaram futebol mesmo assim.

It was raining. Nevertheless, Mike and his friends played soccer.


Estava chovendo. Mesmo assim, Mike e seus amigos jogaram futebol.

Regardless of the rain, Mike and his friends played soccer.


Independentemente da chuva, Mike e seus amigos jogaram futebol.

In the first sentence, anyway conveys the idea that something happened despite
a circumstance that would normally be an impediment. Notice that anyway
is placed at the end of the sentence. In the second sentence, nevertheless
refers back to the supposed impediment that was just mentioned. Regardless
of conveys the same idea, and it is followed by the fact that would be an
impediment. In short, the meaning conveyed by all three sentences remains the
same in this case: the rain did not interfere with the game.
Anyway is not the only word that has different meanings according to the
context. This also happens with verbs, such as to know. For example, this verb
can mean to be familiar with someone. For example:

Mary knows all the employees by name.


A Mary conhece todos os funcionários pelo nome.

In the sentence, the verb knows means being acquainted or familiar with all the employees,
knowing who they are, their names, and having some kind of proximity to them.
To know can also mean to have knowledge about something, as in:

Michelle is a big fan of pop culture. She knows everything about TV shows.
Michelle é uma grande fã de cultura pop. Ela sabe tudo sobre programas de TV.

Here, to know is complemented by about, and it means to have information or knowledge


on a certain topic.

< voltar para o índice


136
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

However, when followed by how, a word that is used to ask or talk about the
way in which something happens or is done, the meaning of this verb changes.
To know how is a verbal construction used to talk about ability. For example:

Do you know how to identify a problem?


Você sabe como identificar um problema?

In the previous example, to know how is followed by another verb, to identify. As you can see, this sentence
conveys the idea of having the ability to do something.
There are different ways to talk about ability. It would be possible to rephrase the previous sentence and say:

Are you able to identify a problem? Can you identify a problem?


Você sabe como identificar um problema? Você sabe como identificar um problema?

All these sentences are asking the same question, but they follow different
structures. Observe:

ABILIT Y

can + verb in the base form to be able + verb in the infinitive


poder + verbo na forma base ser capaz de + verbo no infinitivo

to know how + verb in the infinitive


saber como + verbo no infinitivo

Can is a modal verb, and it is followed by the verb in the base form, that is, in the
infinitive without to. Able is an adjective that means to have the skill or requirement
to do something, that is why we use the verb to be before it. It is followed by the
infinitive. And to know how, as seen before, is also followed by the infinitive.
The verb to know is not the only word that can have different meanings. Some
words not only have different meanings, but they also have different functions.
For example, step can be a noun that means the movement you make when you put
one foot in front of or behind the other when walking. It can also be a verb: to step.
This verb refers to the action of taking a step, in other words, to raise one foot and
put it down in front of or behind the other one in order to walk or move.

< voltar para o índice


137
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

And this verb can mean different things depending on the context and on the
particle that accompanies it. Take a look:

DIFFERENT USES OF TO STEP

to step down to step up


abdicar/deixar intensificar

to step out to step back


sair ( rapidamente) recuar

The particles that accompany the verbs form the phrasal verbs. If we change the
particle, we change the meaning. Take a look at the example:

My friend Michael decided to step down from his position as VP.


Meu amigo Michael decidiu abdicar da sua posição como VP.

In the previous sentence, to step down is formed with the verb to step + down.
Down means to or towards a lower place or position. But step down does not mean
to physically come down a set of stairs. It means to leave a job or an official position,
generally a high-ranked one. VP is the abbreviation for vice president.
Now, observe another sentence:

Sophie was worried about her grades, so she stepped up her studies.
A Sophie estava preocupada com suas notas; então, ela intensificou seus estudos.

Notice that now we have the particle up. To step up means to increase the intensity of
an activity; so, this sentence is stating that Sophie studied more or harder.
If we replace up with out we have a new phrasal verb:

< voltar para o índice


138
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Mark stepped out for a minute, but he will be right back.


O Mark saiu um minuto, mas ele já vai voltar.

To step out means to leave a place, usually for a brief moment.


But if we say step back, we completely change the meaning of the phrasal verb.
Observe:

Whenever we get to a dead end, there is only one reasonable action: to


step back, which, in this case, means to start looking for reasons.
Sempre que chegamos a um beco sem saída, há apenas uma ação razoável:
recuar, o que, nesse caso, significa começar a procurar por motivos.

To step back is to get some distance from a difficult situation in order to think about it calmly.
In a negotiation, it is important to step back to find out what the real problem is. For instance:

Let’s imagine a situation: I’m all by myself, there are no drugstores around, no
delivery services, and I need a painkiller. What is my actual problem?
Vamos imaginar uma situação: estou sozinho, não há farmácias por perto, nem serviço de
entrega, e preciso de um analgésico. Qual é o meu problema real?

Actual means real. So, by asking what, we want a definition. In this case, we are looking for a
definition of the real problem behind needing a painkiller and having no way to get it.
If there is no way of getting what you need, you will reach a dead end, a situation from which there
is no clear solution. In situations like this, the suggestion is to ask why:

Why do I need a painkiller?


Por que eu preciso de um analgésico?

Because I have a headache and I want to get rid of it.


Porque eu tenho uma dor de cabeça e quero me livrar dela.

Why is used to refer to the cause or intention of a certain situation or action. It is the motive or
purpose for which the action is done; and because explains how and why a certain action is done.

< voltar para o índice


139
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

In short, when asking a question about reason, you will use the word why, and when
answering it you will use the word because.
It is important to identify what causes the problem because sometimes people are so used to
solving things repeatedly in the same way that they forget that one solution is just a possibility
amongst others to resolve the situation. In other words:

Most people have had headaches tons of times, and, in most cases, the easiest way
to get rid of them was to take a painkiller.
Muitas pessoas tiveram dores de cabeça inúmeras vezes, e, na maioria dos casos, a
maneira mais fácil de se livrar delas foi tomar um analgésico.

In the previous sentence, there is the expression tons of times. It is a way of


saying that something has happened repeatedly on many occasions. You could
also say many times or yet heaps of times.
The word easiest is the superlative of the adjective easy. Because it is a short
adjective, we form the superlative by switching the Y for an I and adding the
suffix -EST, as we have seen in the previous chapter.
It is common to be tempted to use repeated solutions to repeated problems:

The bottom line here is that we can easily be tricked into picking
immediate solutions, either because they have worked before or
because this is the only solution we can see.
A questão aqui é que nós podemos facilmente ser induzidos a escolher
soluções imediatas, seja porque elas funcionaram antes, ou porque essa é a
única solução que conseguimos enxergar.

Notice that the modal verb can in the previous sentence conveys an idea of
possibility, not ability. To be tricked into something means being led to do
something. This sentence has a word that can be a verb and a noun: picking.
Here, this word is a verb that means to choose.
As a noun, it means choice. Check it out:

We have different kinds of candy. You can take your pick.


Nós temos diferentes tipos de doces. Você pode escolher à vontade.

< voltar para o índice


140
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

To take one’s pick means to make a choice amongst several options. In this
expression, pick is a noun. It conveys the same idea as the word pick as a verb.
Observe another example:

Whenever Mary goes to a restaurant, she picks the salad.


Sempre que Mary vai a um restaurante, ela escolhe a salada.

But the verb to pick has other meanings rather than to choose. For instance:

Jack loves picking apples in the fall.


Jack adora colher maçãs no outono.

After breaking a glass, it is very important to pick the pieces off the ground.
Depois de quebrar um copo, é muito importante catar todos os cacos do chão.

In the first sentence, the verb to pick refers to fruits, so it means to remove from
a plant or a tree. It can be either fruits or flowers.
In the second sentence, the verb to pick is accompanied by off – to pick
something off means to carefully remove something small from a place, usually
the ground.
When negotiating, it is crucial to bear in mind how much it makes a difference to
understand the context, since apparent problems and solutions disguise the real
situation:

In all of these situations, we’ve failed to take a step back and ask why
— “Why do you need ten dollars each?” “Why do you need a two-week
deadline?” “Why can you give me only one?” “Why do you want to have
Japanese or Italian?”
Em todas essas situações, falhamos em recuar e perguntar o porquê: “Por
que cada um de vocês precisa de dez dólares?” “Por que você precisa de
um prazo de duas semanas?” “Por que você só pode me dar uma?” “Por que
você quer comida japonesa ou italiana?”

As you can see, it is always important to ask why.


And in everyday spoken English, there is another way of asking for reasons.
Instead of saying why, people may say how come. Have a look:

< voltar para o índice


141
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

How come you need 10 dollars each? How come you can give me only one?
Why do you need 10 dollars each? Why can you give me only one?
Por que cada um de vocês precisa de 10 dólares? Por que você só pode me dar uma?

Even though they mean the same, after how come you will have an affirmative sentence, while after why
you will have an interrogative one:

How come + affirmative form Why + interrogative form


How come + forma afirmativa da frase Why + forma interrogativa da frase

The answer for how come will be introduced by because just the same. Observe:

How come you want to have Japanese or Italian?


Por que você quer comer comida japonesa ou italiana?

Because they are my favorite kinds of food.


Porque elas são minhas comidas favoritas.

How come is a typically oral trait of the language, used in very informal
situations.

Now you know that context is everything when it comes to languages.


You also learned how to use different words to say the same thing,
and how to use the same word to say different things. You also learned
how to ask and answer about reasons.

< voltar para o índice


142
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 3.

Activities
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.

( 1 ) colher maçãs ( 7 ) sair ( ) to step back ( ) actual

( 2 ) escolher a salada ( 8 ) abdicar ( ) to step down ( ) to get rid of

( 3 ) catar ( 9 ) beco sem saída ( ) to pick the salad ( ) tons of times

( 4 ) se livrar ( 10 ) saber/conhecer ( ) to know ( ) dead end

( 5 ) recuar ( 11 ) inúmeras ( ) to step out ( ) to pick apples

( 6 ) intensificar ( 12 ) real ( ) to pick off ( ) to step up

3. Nevertheless / Anyway
B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words according to the translation.

2. anyway / nevertheless
Activity B – Answers

4. Regardless of
1. But what are your objectives ?

5. What’s up
Mas quais são os seus objetivos, afinal?
1. anyway

6. anyway
2. It was raining. Mike and his friends played soccer .
Estava chovendo. Mike e seus amigos jogaram futebol mesmo assim.
11. tons of times
8. to step down
7. to step out

10. to know
9. dead end

12. actual
3. It was raining. , Mike and his friends played soccer.
Estava chovendo. Mesmo assim, Mike e seus amigos jogaram futebol.
Activity A – Answers

2. to pick the salad

4. the rain, Mike and his friends played soccer.


1. to pick apples

5. to step back
4. to get rid of

Independentemente da chuva, Mike e seus amigos jogaram futebol.


6. to step up
3. to pick off

5. Hi Mark! ?
Oi Mark! E aí?

6. Well, things are a bit complicated right now. But, , how are you doing?
Bem, as coisas estão um pouco complicadas agora. Mas, de todo modo, como está você?

< voltar para o índice


143
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 4.

Throughout the last chapters, you have seen the use of modal verbs, such as
may, might, will, should, can, and could. You saw these last in the construction
of conditionals. Let’s get back to them starting with can. As with all modal verbs,
can will follow a basic structure:

MODAL VERB CAN


Basic Structure – Affirmative Form

Subject + Modal Verb + Main Verb + Complement


Sujeito + Verbo Modal + Verbo Principal + Complemento

Now, look at these sentences formed with the modal verb can:

MODAL VERB CAN – AFFIRMATIVE FORM

If we understand the concepts of a negotiation, we can reach a win-win


outcome.
Se nós entendemos os conceitos de uma negociação, podemos chegar a
um resultado ganha-ganha.

Immediate solutions can be tricky.


Soluções imediatas podem ser enganosas.

The first sentence is a conditional: the if-clause is in the simple present, and the main clause
follows the basic structure of the affirmative form of modal verbs. The modal verb can conveys
the idea of possibility to the verb reach.
The second sentence is not a conditional. It is an affirmative sentence formed with the modal
verb can. It speaks of a possibility outside of a conditional. The structure follows the basic
structure of the affirmative form for modal verbs. The subject is immediate solutions, the
modal verb can precedes the main verb to be, and tricky is the complement.
Sometimes, it may be difficult to tell possibility from probability apart. It is a subtle difference,
and it depends largely on the context. Observe the following examples as an illustration:

< voltar para o índice


144
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

POSSIBILIT Y AND PROBABILIT Y

Rita lives in Rio, so she can have fun at the beach.


A Rita mora no Rio, então, ela pode se divertir na praia.

Rita may have fun at the beach later.


Pode ser que a Rita se divirta na praia mais tarde.

Note that the modal verb can conveys an idea of possibility, because it is
possible for Rita to go to the beach if she wants to, since she lives in Rio de
Janeiro. And the modal verb may conveys the idea of probability; it means that
there is a chance that she will have fun at the beach later, it is likely that this will
happen.
In other words, a possibility is the chance that something might happen or might
be true whereas a probability is a measure of how likely something is to happen.
In addition to the idea of possibility, the modal verb can is also used to convey the
idea of ability in the present. Look at this sentence:

MODAL VERB CAN – ABILIT Y IN THE PRESENT


Affirmative Form

Michael is a polyglot. He can speak six languages.


O Michael é poliglota. Ele sabe falar seis línguas.

The sentence with the modal verb follows the basic structure of the affirmative form:
He is the subject, can is the modal verb, followed by the main verb in its base form:
speak. Six languages is the complement. This sentence refers to an ability and not a
possibility. This is something that Michael is able to do, he has the necessary skills,
the necessary competence to do it.
If you want to talk about possibility or ability in the negative form, that is, to refer to
lack of possibility or lack of ability, you can use the negative form of can. This negative
form will follow the basic structure of other modal verbs, which is as follows:

MODAL VERB CAN


Basic Structure - Negative Form

Subject + Modal Verb + Not + Main Verb + Complement


Sujeito + Verbo Modal + Not + Verbo Principal + Complemento

< voltar para o índice


145
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Look at these sentences in the negative form:

MODAL VERB CAN


Negative Form

Lucy and James cannot / can’t work together. They do not get along.
Lucy e James não podem trabalhar juntos. Eles não se dão bem.

In the previous example, Lucy and James is the subject, and the modal verb can
is followed by the negative particle not. The main verb, work, is in the base form.
Together is the complement. Notice we can either use cannot or its contracted form
can’t. Cannot is more emphatic than the contracted form, but the meaning of the
sentence does not change, they both refer to something that is not possible.
You saw that the modal verb can is also used to talk about ability. So, in the negative
form you will use it to talk about a skill that the subject does not have. Take a look:

MODAL VERB CAN – ABILIT Y


Negative Form

Lucy is a terrible cook; she cannot / can’t boil an egg.


A Lucy é uma cozinheira terrível. Ela não consegue cozinhar um ovo.

As we know, the modal verb can has a contracted and a non-contracted form.
This does not change the meaning of the sentence, as it only varies the level of
emphasis of the negative form.
In the interrogative form, can is used to ask about a possibility or ability in the
present. And it will also follow the general interrogative sentence structure of
modal verbs. Take a look:

MODAL VERB CAN


Interrogative Form

Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb + Complement


Verbo Modal + Sujeito + Verbo Principal + Complemento

< voltar para o índice


146
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Observe this sentence in the interrogative form:

MODAL VERB CAN – ABILIT Y


Interrogative Form

Can you speak English?


Você sabe falar inglês?

As you can see, this sentence follows the general structure: the
modal verb can is at the beginning of the sentence, followed by the
subject, you. Then, we have the main verb in its base form; speak.
And at the end, the complement – English.
The previous question refers to an ability, but can is also used to
ask a question about a possibility. Look at the following example:

MODAL VERB CAN – POSSIBILIT Y


Interrogative Form

Can the doctor see Jane this Thursday at 9:30 am?


O médico pode ver a Jane nesta quinta às 9:30 da manhã?

This sentence follows the general structure of the interrogative form, but because
of the context, can now refers to a possibility.
In the interrogative form, can is also used to make requests. Observe:

MODAL VERB CAN – INFORMAL RE QUEST


Interrogative Form

Can you close the window? It’s very windy today.


Você pode fechar a janela? Está ventando muito hoje.

Once more, the sentence follows the basic structure of the interrogative form of
modal verbs, but the context changes its meaning. This is a request for someone
to close the window.
There is another modal verb whose interrogative form can be used to make
requests. It is the modal verb could. Observe:

< voltar para o índice


147
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

MODAL VERB COULD – FORMAL RE QUEST


Interrogative Form

Lily, could you pass the salt to Mary, please?


Lily, você poderia passar o sal para a Mary, por favor?

Both sentences follow the basic structure of the interrogative form we have seen
so far, but the tone changes a little. That happens because a request with could
sounds more formal than a request with can.
We can use could to talk about possibility, but it sounds a little more remote
than the idea expressed with can. So, again, context is everything in any
language.
Observe these examples with could:

MODAL VERB COULD – POSSIBILIT Y

If they listened to each other, they could reach a compromise.


Se eles escutassem uns aos outros, poderiam chegar a um consenso.

Mary isn’t answering her phone, she could be in a meeting.


A Mary não está atendendo o telefone dela, ela pode estar em uma reunião.

The first sentence is in the second conditional, so the if-clause has to be in


the simple past, and the main clause has to be formed with a modal verb. In
this case, the modal verb could conveys a remote possibility in a hypothetical
situation. The second sentence refers to a possibility that is not confirmed to
something that we do know: Mary is not answering her phone, the reason for it is
a possibility.
Could can also be used to convey ability. But this time, it is used to talk about
ability in the past. Take a look:

MODAL VERB COULD – ABILIT Y IN THE PAST

When Sophie was younger, she could climb trees.


Quando a Sophie era mais jovem, ela conseguia subir em árvores.

Paul could drive when he was fifteen years old.


Paul sabia dirigir quando ele tinha quinze anos.

< voltar para o índice


148
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Observe that both sentences have a verb conjugated in the simple past: was.
This sets the context of something that is not taking place in the present moment,
but in the past. Therefore, the modal verb could refers to an ability that the
subject had in the past. We do not know whether or not they still have this ability,
but we do know they had it back then.
You can also build sentences in the negative form with the modal verb could,
just the same way you do with the other modal verbs: you will just add not after
the modal. Could not and its contracted form couldn’t will both convey the idea
of lack of possibility or lack of ability. The non-contracted form gives more
emphasis than the contracted form.
Once more, could will follow the basic structure of modal verbs, which is as
follows:

MODAL VERB – COULD


Negative Form

Subject + Modal Verb + Not + Main Verb + Complement


Sujeito + Verbo Modal + Not + Verbo Principal + Complemento

Now let’s look at some sentences with could in the negative form:

MODAL VERB COULD – L ACK OF ABILIT Y

Sophie was into sports, but she couldn’t play basketball at all.
A Sophie gostava de esportes, mas ela não conseguia jogar basquete de jeito nenhum.

In the previous sentence, there is a verb in the simple past: was. The modal verb is in the
contracted negative form, indicating a lack of ability in the past. Sophie was not able to
play basketball, she lacked the skills to do so.

MODAL VERB COULD – L ACK OF POSSIBILIT Y

I couldn’t possibly borrow money from my in-laws, it would be so awkward.


Eu não poderia pegar dinheiro emprestado dos meus sogros, seria estranho demais.

< voltar para o índice


149
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Now the context of this sentence refers to a lack of possibility. It refers to


something that is or will not be possible to happen. So, it refers to the present or
the future, not the past.
Throughout this chapter, you saw how to form questions with modal verbs
simply using the interrogative form. It is worth mentioning that questions of this
kind usually generate two types of answers: either yes or no.
But this is not the only way to ask questions, as we can use question words.
The difference is that you will no longer have yes or no as possible answers. An
example of a question word is what. Observe:

WHAT + INTERROGATIVE FORM

What can Mike cook for us?


O que o Mike pode cozinhar para nós?

The question word is the first element of the sentence. After that, we have the
modal verb can in the structure of the interrogative form, which is the main verb
in the base form, cook, the subject Mike, and the complement – for us. In this
question, can refers to an ability or a possibility, it will depend on the context.
But we can also use what + interrogative form without modal verbs, check it out:

WHAT + INTERROGATIVE FORM


Simple Present

What are your objectives?


Quais são os seus objetivos?

What do Mary and Frank want to drink?


O que a Mary e o Frank querem beber?

Both sentences are in the interrogative form of the simple present. The first one
is in the interrogative form of the verb to be: are, and it comes before the subject,
your objectives. The second sentence is in the interrogative form of other verbs;
the auxiliary verb do precedes the subject, Mary and Frank; want is the main
verb in the base form, and to drink is the complement.
None of these questions can be answered with yes or no.
What + interrogative form can also be used in the simple past. Look at these
examples:

< voltar para o índice


150
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

WHAT + INTERROGATIVE FORM


Simple Past

What was the name of the first president of the United States?
Qual era o nome do primeiro presidente dos Estados Unidos?

What did John take for his headache?


O que o John tomou para a sua dor de cabeça?

The first sentence follows the basic structure of the interrogative form of the verb
to be in the simple past: the verb was, and it precedes the subject, which is a bit
long in this case: the name of the first president of the United States.
The second sentence follows the basic structure of the interrogative form of other
verbs in the simple past: the auxiliary verb did, followed by the subject, John. The
main verb is in the base form: take. For his headache is the complement.
As was the case with the previous examples, none of these questions can be
answered with yes or no.
The question word what can also be used to ask about an action. In such a case,
you will need a neutral verb to do the trick. Check it out:

QUESTION WORD WHAT

There is so much work. What can Mary do to help?


Tem tanto trabalho. O que a Mary pode fazer para ajudar?

Do is a neutral verb, meaning an action in general, in a broad sense. The answer


can be any verb whatsoever that expresses the action that Mary is going to
perform, not necessarily with the verb do.
Now, if you want to ask a more specific question, you can use what followed by
a noun. As in:

WHAT KIND OF

What kind of movies do you prefer: comedy or drama?


Que tipo de filmes você prefere: comédia ou drama?

What kind of food would you like? Japanese or Italian?


Que tipo de comida você gostaria? Japonesa ou italiana?

< voltar para o índice


151
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Kind means type, so what kind means what type. Observe that you need to use
of right after kind and then add the element you are referring to. In both cases, the
sentence structure that follows is in the interrogative form of modal verbs. These
questions cannot be answered with yes or no, they need a specific answer.
But what is not the only question word there is. In the vocabulary part of this
chapter, you also saw the question word why. Why is used to ask about reason or
motive. Observe:

WHY + INTERROGATIVE FORM

Why can you give me only one?


Por que você só pode me dar uma?

Why do you want Japanese food?


Por que você quer comida japonesa?

Both these sentences follow the basic structure of the interrogative form of modal
verbs, but they ask a question about a reason and none can be answered with yes or
no. As mentioned in the vocabulary part of this chapter, answers to questions with
why will usually start with because.

In this chapter, you learned how to talk about possibility, ability, and make
requests. You also learned how to form some questions with the question words
what and why. If you want to learn more about these topics, you can refer to the
Grammar Guide section at the end of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Interrogative Form Page 194


Modal Verb Can Page 203
Modal Verb Could Page 206
Question Word What Page 232
Question Word Why Page 239

< voltar para o índice


152
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 5.

Activities
A. Change the sentences into the interrogative to form yes/no questions.

1. They could reach a compromise.


Eles poderiam chegar a um consenso.
(interrogative)

2. She could be in a meeting.


Ela pode estar em uma reunião.
(interrogative)

3. Michael is a polyglot.
O Michael é poliglota.
(interrogative)

4. He can speak six languages.


Ele sabe falar seis línguas.
(interrogative)

5. It’s very windy today.


Está ventando muito hoje.
(interrogative)

6. Rita lives in Rio.


A Rita mora no Rio.
(interrogative)

7. It would be awkward.
Seria estranho.
(interrogative)

8. Immediate solutions can be tricky.


Soluções imediatas podem ser enganosas.
(interrogative)

< voltar para o índice


153
Chapter 6 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

B. Fill in the blanks with the missing question words.

1. can Mike cook for us?


O que o Mike pode cozinhar pra gente?

2. can you give me only one?


Por que você só pode me dar uma?

3. movies do you prefer: comedy or drama?


Que tipo de filmes você prefere: comédia ou drama?

4. are your objectives?


Quais são os seus objetivos?

5. was the name of the first president of the United States?


Qual era o nome do primeiro presidente dos Estados Unidos?

6. do you want Japanese food?


Por que você quer comida japonesa?

8. Can immediate solutions be tricky?


7. Would it be awkward?
6. Why 6. Does Rita live in Rio?
5. What 5. Is it very windy today?
4. What 4. Can he speak six languages?
3. What kind of 3. Is Michael a polyglot?
2. Why 2. Could she be in a meeting?
1. What 1. Could they reach a compromise?
Activity B – Answers Activity A – Answers

< voltar para o índice


154
7
The win-win
The Win-Win
outcome
Outcome
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 1.

In this chapter, you will learn about word families and expressions formed with
verbs. You will also learn about the function of nouns, verbs and adjectives. You
will also see some important vocabulary and grammar topics to make it happen.
Now look at the script of The Win-Win Outcome.

THE WIN-WIN OUTCOME

Here we are—win-win, the only outcome in which both parties meet


their interests and improve their relationship.

We’ve walked a long way to get here, and I wouldn’t blame you if,
based on the examples we worked with so far, you got here with more
questions than answers.

I mean, if two people need 10 dollars, and 10 dollars is all they have, it is
quite easy to picture a lose-lose outcome.

Since they don’t value the relationship as much as they should, they
might as well end up fighting and tearing the bills, leading to an
outcome in which they both end with nothing and their relationship
worsens.

It’s not hard to picture a win-lose situation either—one of them gets all
the money, and the other gets nothing.

And if both of them care enough about their relationship, they can still
compromise; that is, each gets 5 dollars. They are then able to keep a
good relationship, but none will fully achieve their goal.

But, considering all of these scenarios, I assume you must be quite


puzzled by now:

How would it be possible to have an outcome in which both parties


improve their relationship and meet their full objectives getting 10
dollars each if 10 dollars is all they have?

< voltar para o índice


156
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Simple. They won’t.

Not if they keep on focusing on the position, which, in this case, is the
amount of money they are negotiating. As much as each of them may
value the relationship and wish they could both keep the 10 dollars, this is
not possible, and so the best outcome they will ever get is a compromise.

What if they stop for a second and ask each other:

Why do you need the 10 dollars?

Well, now we’ve started to work our way out into a win-win outcome. By
asking this question, we deviate from the position and aim at the interest.

So, let’s say each of them needs the money to get a snack at school. When
they are both honest about their interests and have a true desire to meet
not only their own, but the other parties’ interest as well, they can come
to a third solution, which could be, “well, if we both want the money to
have a snack, then we could stop by at the supermarket, which is cheaper
than the school cafeteria, and get enough food for both of us with the 10
dollars.”

Do you realize what happened here? By focusing on their interests, that


is, on what they both needed the 10 dollars for, they were able to meet
their interests fully, to have an honest talk in which it’s clear that they both
care about each other, and maybe even to have a good time picking their
snacks at the market. They went the third way. And, believe me, in every
negotiation, there are always numerous ways to go when you focus on
interests.

But, sometimes, you don’t even need to go a third way.

Let me give you an example: after a long honest talk, an insurance broker
decides to offer his client his cheapest home insurance because it’s clear
that it will meet her needs. She’s happy to pay a lot less than she expected
and have everything she asked for.

But how is that a win-win if the broker has probably gotten a lower sales
commission?

I’ll tell you how—by showing he really cares and wants to meet his client’s
needs, they have both developed a long-term relationship in which not
only his client kept on buying insurance from him, but also recommended
his services to a lot of her friends. In other words, his client spent less, and
he has, in fact, more than tripled his commission in the long run.

< voltar para o índice


157
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

That’s what win-win is all about. It’s not a trick or a secret strategy.
Win-win is a mindset in which we understand and truly desire that all
the parties have their interests met, and that our greatest goal in life is
never to waste the chance to develop caring and meaningful long-term
relationships.

Think win-win. And spread the word.

A NE GOCIAÇÃO GANHA-GANHA

Aqui estamos nós — ganha-ganha, a única negociação em que ambas


as partes alcançam seus interesses e melhoram seu relacionamento.

Nós percorremos um longo caminho para chegar até aqui, e eu não te


culparia se, com base nos exemplos que trabalhamos até agora, você
tenha chegado aqui com mais perguntas do que respostas.

Quero dizer, se duas pessoas precisam de 10 dólares cada, e 10 dólares


é tudo o que elas têm, é muito fácil imaginar uma negociação perde-
perde.

Já que eles não valorizam o relacionamento tanto quanto deveriam, eles


podem muito bem acabar brigando e rasgando as notas, levando a um
resultado no qual ambos acabam com nada e o relacionamento deles piora.

Não é difícil imaginar uma situação ganha-perde também — um deles


fica com todo o dinheiro, e o outro fica sem nada.

E se ambos se importam o suficiente com o relacionamento, ainda


podem chegar a um consenso; ou seja, cada um recebe 5 dólares.
Assim, eles poderão manter um bom relacionamento, mas nenhum
alcançará totalmente o seu objetivo.

Mas, considerando todos esses cenários, a essa altura presumo que


você esteja bem confuso:

Como seria possível uma negociação em que ambas as partes


melhoram seu relacionamento e alcançam seus objetivos por completo
recebendo 10 dólares cada se 10 dólares é tudo o que eles têm?

< voltar para o índice


158
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Simples. Eles não vão.

Não se continuarem focando na posição, que, neste caso, é a


quantidade de dinheiro que estão negociando. Por mais que cada um
deles valorize o relacionamento e deseje que ambos pudessem ficar
com os 10 dólares, isto não é possível, então o melhor resultado é
chegar a um consenso.

E se eles pararem por um segundo e se perguntarem:

Por que você precisa dos 10 dólares?

Bem, agora começamos a trabalhar rumo a uma negociação ganha-


ganha. Ao fazer esta pergunta, desviamos da posição e focamos no
interesse.

Então, digamos que cada um deles precise do dinheiro para comprar um


lanche na escola. Quando ambos são honestos sobre seus interesses e
têm um desejo verdadeiro de atender não só ao próprio interesse, mas
os dos outros envolvidos também, eles podem chegar a uma terceira
solução, que poderia ser: “bem, se nós dois queremos o dinheiro para
comprar um lanche, então poderíamos passar no supermercado, que é
mais barato do que o refeitório da escola, e comprar comida suficiente
para nós dois com os 10 dólares.”

Percebe o que aconteceu aqui? Ao se concentrar em seus interesses,


ou seja, em por que ambos precisavam dos 10 dólares, eles foram
capazes de atender aos seus interesses plenamente, de ter uma
conversa honesta em que fica claro que ambos se preocupam um com
o outro, e talvez até mesmo de se divertir escolhendo seus lanches no
mercado. Eles optaram pela terceira alternativa. E, acredite, em todas as
negociações, há sempre inúmeras alternativas a se seguir quando você
se concentra nos interesses.

Mas, às vezes, você nem precisa recorrer a uma terceira alternativa.

Deixe-me dar um exemplo: depois de uma longa conversa sincera, um


corretor de seguros decide oferecer à sua cliente seu seguro residencial
mais barato, pois está claro que vai atender às suas necessidades.
Ela fica feliz em pagar muito menos do que esperava e ter tudo o que
pediu.

Mas como isso é um ganha-ganha se o corretor provavelmente recebeu


uma comissão menor?

< voltar para o índice


159
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Vou dizer como — ao demonstrar que ele realmente se importa e quer


atender às necessidades de sua cliente, ambos desenvolveram um
relacionamento de longo prazo no qual não só sua cliente continuou
comprando seguros dele, mas também recomendou seus serviços a
muitos amigos. Em outras palavras, a cliente gastou menos, e ele, na
verdade, mais do que triplicou sua comissão a longo prazo.

É disso que se trata o ganha-ganha. Não é um truque ou uma estratégia


secreta. O ganha-ganha é uma mentalidade na qual entendemos e
realmente desejamos que todos envolvidos tenham seus interesses
atendidos, e nosso maior objetivo na vida é nunca desperdiçar a
oportunidade de desenvolver relacionamentos atenciosos, significativos
e duradouros.

Pense ganha-ganha. E divulgue essa ideia.

< voltar para o índice


160
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 2.

Throughout this module, you saw some types of negotiation and the importance
of considering relationships and objectives when trying to reach an agreement.
In this chapter, you will learn about the win-win outcome. Even though this is the
most desired outcome, it is often the most challenging. So:

Here we are – win-win, the only outcome in which both parties meet
their interests and improve their relationship.
Aqui estamos nós — ganha-ganha, a única negociação em que ambas as
partes alcançam seus interesses e melhoram seu relacionamento.

When we say win-win is the only outcome, the word only emphasizes the idea that this
situation is true just or exclusively for this outcome. And when we say both parties meet their
interests, we are emphasizing that one and the other do so.
As you may already know, to meet is a verb. In this case, it is followed by the complement
interests, forming to meet interests, which means to achieve or fulfill interests.
There are other complements which can be collocated with the verb to meet with a similar
meaning. Have a look:

to meet interests
alcançar / atender a interesses

Here we are – win-win, the only outcome in which both parties meet their interests and improve
their relationship.
Aqui estamos – ganha-ganha, a única negociação em que ambas as partes alcançam seus interesses e
melhoram seu relacionamento.

to meet a target
alcançar / bater uma meta

Sarah was an excellent addition to the team. She always met the monthly sales target.
A Sarah foi um excelente acréscimo à equipe. Ela sempre alcançou a meta mensal de vendas.

< voltar para o índice


161
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

to meet standards
alcançar / estar de acordo com / cumprir padrões

Before a car is sold, it has to meet safety standards.


Antes de um carro ser vendido, ele tem que cumprir normas de segurança.

to meet a deadline
cumprir um prazo

Jack was fired because he rarely met deadlines.


O Jack foi demitido porque ele raramente cumpria prazos.

In all of the previous expressions, to meet is synonymous with to fulfill.


Now, observe this next example:

to meet with someone to meet a goal


encontrar-se com alguém alcançar um objetivo

The president met with the chief of staff to set a plan of action and
meet the goal of reducing the unemployment rates.
O presidente se encontrou com o chefe de gabinete para traçar um plano
de ação e alcançar o objetivo de reduzir as taxas de desemprego.

To meet a goal is the same as to achieve it. However, in the beginning of the
sentence, to meet with means to get together with a person. Notice that, in this
case, the verb to meet is followed by the preposition with. When you meet with
someone, you are talking about getting together with that person in order to talk or
discuss something. It is an intentional encounter.
You have probably seen the verb to meet meaning to get together with someone
but without the preposition with. That is also correct; however, when you do not use
the preposition, this verb can have two different meanings. Check it out:

< voltar para o índice


162
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

The president met with the chief of staff to set a plan of action.
The president met the chief of staff to set a plan of action.
O presidente se encontrou com o chefe de gabinete para traçar um plano de ação.

You’ll never guess who I met at the club the other day: your ex!
Você nunca vai adivinhar quem eu encontrei na boate outro dia: seu ex!

As you can see, without the preposition, to meet can either mean to get together with
someone intentionally or to encounter them by chance.
Now, there is another expression with this verb. Take a look:

In a negotiation, it is important that both parties meet halfway.


Em uma negociação, é importante que ambas as partes cheguem a um meio-termo.

To meet halfway means to make concessions so as to reach an agreement.


Halfway literally means at a midpoint in space; however, this expression is not to be
interpreted literally, but metaphorically.
So far, you have seen to meet as a verb, but the word meet can also be a noun.
Check it out:

When Sue was in high school, she had weekly basketball meets.
Quando a Sue estava no Ensino Médio, ela tinha competições semanais de
basquete.

Notice that meets in this sentence is a plural noun, which is why it has an -S at
the end. It is not a verbal conjugation. It is common to use the noun meet to refer to
sports competitions.
There are several words in English that can convey many different ideas. One word
can generate others that will have different functions. Meet can be a verb and a
noun, and there is also another noun derived from it, which is meeting. A meeting is
an event where people gather to discuss and decide things. For example:

Sheila asked her assistant to schedule a meeting with the client.


A Sheila pediu para sua assistente agendar uma reunião com o cliente.

< voltar para o índice


163
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

In the following sentence, there is yet another case. Take a look and observe the word way:

We’ve walked a long way to get here, and I wouldn’t blame you if, based on the
examples we’ve worked with so far, you got here with more questions than answers.
Nós percorremos um longo caminho para chegar até aqui, e eu não te culparia se, com
base nos exemplos que trabalhamos até agora, você tenha chegado aqui com mais
perguntas do que respostas.

The word way, in this sentence, is a noun that means path. You have already seen this word as
an intensifier in the expression way better, in which way is the same as much.
Sometimes, a word can sound like another, but they will have completely different meanings
and uses. Compare the following examples:

Until now, you got here with more questions than answers.
Até agora, você chegou aqui com mais perguntas do que respostas.

First Mary meditated, then she drank her coffee and went for a run.
Primeiro, a Mary meditou, então, bebeu seu café e foi dar uma corrida.

Than is used to make comparisons; in the previous case, more questions than answers.
However, then is a word that can mean the same thing as next. It introduces the next action in
a timeline.
It is quite obvious how much context makes a difference to help us understand the meaning of
words and the role they play in the speech.
Take a look at the following sentence; it will give you several opportunities to explore this
further. The context here is the story of two brothers who should have had two $10 bills but
ended up with just one.
Focus on the following four verbs in this sentence: to value, to end up, to tear, and to worsen.

Since they don’t value the relationship as much as they should, they might as well
end up fighting and tearing the bills, leading to an outcome in which they both end
with nothing and their relationship worsens.
Já que eles não valorizam o relacionamento tanto quanto deveriam, eles podem muito
bem acabar brigando e rasgando as notas, levando a um resultado no qual ambos acabam
com nada e o relacionamento deles piora.

< voltar para o índice


164
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Let’s analyze these verbs by their different uses and by the word families to which they belong. A
word family is a group of words with a common base or root word. This group can include words
with different functions, such as verbs, adjectives, nouns, and adverbs.
We will start with value used as a noun. Have a look:

One of the consequences of gentrification is that rent value increases.


Uma das consequências da gentrificação é que o valor do aluguel aumenta.

The restaurant on the corner has lunch specials that are really good value for money.
O restaurante na esquina tem especiais de almoço com um bom custo benefício.

During the meeting Paul said the company has a valuation of one billion dollars.
Durante a reunião, o Paul disse que a empresa tem uma valoração de um bilhão de dólares.

In the first sentence, value is the same as worth. In the second sentence, good value
for money is an expression, which means that something is worth its price. Finally,
in the third sentence, we have a noun which derives from value, valuation. It refers to
the estimated amount of money something is worth, especially a company.
Sometimes a word not only has different functions, but also different meanings
whenever accompanied by a preposition, for example. It is the case of end, which
can be both a noun and a verb. As a verb, its meaning changes depending on the
complement.
Observe the examples:

Mary was so tired that she ended up sleeping.


A Mary estava tão cansada que acabou dormindo.

To end up is a phrasal verb that means to get to a particular situation after a series of
events, especially when you did not plan it.

The meeting ended late at night.


A reunião acabou tarde da noite.

In this case, to end is the same as to finish. If we wish to say the way something
ended, we can use the preposition with afterwards. Observe:

< voltar para o índice


165
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

The meeting ended with a coffee break.


A reunião acabou com uma pausa para o café.

The word end can also be a noun. Take a look:

The end of the year was marked by fireworks.


O fim do ano foi marcado por fogos de artifício.

Here, end is the same as the final part of something. But this noun can be used in
a different context:

Half the budget of this project was dedicated to marketing ends.


Metade do orçamento desse projeto foi dedicada a fins de marketing.

In the previous example, ends is the same as purposes.


Now take a look at another verb, to tear, which means to damage something such as paper or
cloth by ripping it. However, when accompanied by a preposition, it becomes a phrasal verb
with a slight but important change in meaning. Take a look:

Jane and Michael got so angry during the negotiation that they took
the contract and tore it apart.
A Jane e o Michael ficaram tão bravos durante a negociação que pegaram
o contrato e o rasgaram.

Note that to tear apart, in this context, is a phrasal verb that means to pull and rip something
violently in small pieces. So, it implies somewhat of anger or despair.
But tear can also be a noun with two different meanings. Look:

Lilly was mortified when she realized she had a tear in her pants.
A Lilly ficou envergonhada quando percebeu que havia um rasgo em suas calças.

The first time we went to a Broadway play, we had tears in our eyes.
A primeira vez em que fomos a um musical da Broadway, ficamos com lágrimas nos olhos.

< voltar para o índice


166
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

In the first previous example, tear is a hole in fabric or paper. It is pronounced


with an open E. In the second example, however, tear refers to the liquid that
flows from one’s eyes while crying. It is pronounced with a long E.
And since you are learning about word families, let’s take a look at a verb that
comes from a comparative: to worsen. You have seen that the comparative form
of the adjective bad is worse, from which this verb derives. It means to make
or become worse. A synonym in this case would be to aggravate. In fact, to
make things worse is a rather common expression used to convey the idea of
aggravation.
Take a look at these examples:

Working conditions worsened during the recession.


As condições de trabalho pioraram durante a recessão.

Paul didn’t get the job, and to make things worse, his wife was fired.
Paul não conseguiu o emprego, e, para piorar, sua esposa foi demitida.

Just like you have seen with to worsen, to better is a verb that also originates
from the comparative form of the adjective good. A synonym for this verb is to
improve, or you can use to make something better. Take a look:

Michael invested in online classes to better his grades.


O Michael investiu em aulas online pra melhorar as notas dele.

Michael invested in online classes to make his grades better.


O Michael investiu em aulas online para melhorar as notas dele.

Now, take a look at this other example to find out more verbs and their word families:

Considering all of these scenarios, I assume you must be quite puzzled.


Considerando todos esses cenários, eu presumo que você esteja bem confuso.

Here, to assume means to accept something is true even without proof. A synonym for this
verb is to presume. This verb also means to undertake or take over something, as in to
assume an office, or to acquire, as in to assume control, but it is more common for you to find
to assume as a synonym for to presume, which is also the case here.

< voltar para o índice


167
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Notice that the word puzzled is an adjective that means confused or intrigued. However, the
same word can be used as a verb. Take a look:

Some questions about the universe have puzzled scientists for centuries.
Algumas perguntas sobre o universo confundem os cientistas há séculos.

To puzzle someone is the same as to confuse or bewilder someone.


Puzzle can also be a noun. Take a look:

Every Sunday Mary did a puzzle with her kids.


Todo domingo, a Mary montava um quebra-cabeça com seus filhos.

In this case, puzzle means a kind of game or toy that has lots of pieces you have to put
together, usually to form a picture. It is also called a jigsaw.

Now you know some word families and how a word can have
several functions and meanings according to the context.
You also learned some synonyms and phrasal verbs.

< voltar para o índice


168
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 3.

Activities
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.

( 1 ) traçar um plano ( 7 ) acabar ( ) to value ( ) to worsen

( 2 ) confundir ( 8 ) fim ( ) to end ( ) tears

( 3 ) reunião ( 9 ) rasgar ( ) to set a plan ( ) to better

( 4 ) valorizar ( 10 ) lágrimas ( ) to tear ( ) end

( 5 ) valor ( 11 ) melhorar ( ) valuation ( ) to puzzle

( 6 ) valoração ( 12 ) piorar ( ) meeting ( ) value

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words according to the translation.

1. Here we are – win-win, the only outcome in which both parties and
improve their relationship.
Aqui estamos nós — ganha-ganha, a única negociação em que ambas as partes alcançam seus
interesses e melhoram seu relacionamento.

2. The president the chief of staff to set a plan


of action.

5. meet safety standards


4. met the sales target
O presidente se encontrou com o chefe de gabinete para traçar um plano de ação.
Activity B – Answers
1. meet their interests
2. met with / met

6. met deadlines
3. meet halfway

3. In a negotiation, it is important that both parties .


Em uma negociação, é importante que ambas as partes cheguem a um meio-termo.

4. Sarah was an excellent addition to the team. She always


.
12. to worsen
11. to better

A Sarah foi um excelente acréscimo à equipe. Ela sempre alcançou a meta de vendas.
9. to tear
10. tears
7. to end
8. end

5. Before a car is sold, it has to .


Activity A – Answers

Antes de um carro ser vendido, ele tem que cumprir normas de segurança.
1. to set a plan
2. to puzzle

6. valuation
3. meeting
4. to value

6. Jack was fired because he rarely .


5. value

O Jack foi demitido porque ele raramente cumpria prazos.

< voltar para o índice


169
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 4.

Throughout this module, you have learned about the simple past. It is used to talk
about an action that begins and ends at a given moment in the past.
You saw that regular verbs generally form their conjugations by adding the suffix
-ED, and that irregular verbs vary a little more. And you also learned that the simple
past of the verb to be follows its own conjugation rules.
With that in mind, take a look at these sentences:

SIMPLE PAST
Affirmative Form

subject + main verb + complement


sujeito + verbo principal + complemento

Jack was at work yesterday.


O Jack estava no trabalho ontem.

A year ago, Michael and Jane traveled to Japan for their honeymoon.
Um ano atrás, o Michael e a Jane viajaram para o Japão para a lua de mel deles.

In high school, Sue had basketball meets.


No Ensino Médio, Sue tinha competições de basquete.

Regardless of the verb you are using, as you have seen, the sentences in the
affirmative form in the simple past follow the structure subject + main verb +
complement.
Notice that in high school does not refer to a physical place, but to a moment in
time in which people were high school students. It is an adverbial phrase which
works as an adverb of time, defining when the situation happened in the past:

ADVERBS OF TIME

Yesterday A year ago In high school


Ontem Um ano atrás No Ensino Médio

< voltar para o índice


170
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

When the action took place at a definite time in the past, the appropriate verb form is the
simple past; however, not all verb forms that refer to past actions follow the same general
structure and the same rules. That is the case of the present perfect. Observe:

PRESENT PERFE CT
Affirmative Form

subject + auxiliary verb have + main verb in the past participle + complement
sujeito + verbo auxiliar have + verbo principal no particípio passado + complemento

We have walked a long way to get here.


Nós percorremos um longo caminho para chegar até aqui.

As you can see, the verb to have in the present will serve as an auxiliary verb in this sentence
structure. And it will be the only verb within that structure to be conjugated. We use have for I,
we, you, and they, and has for the third person singular – he, she, and it.
The main verb will be in the past participle. To understand how to form the past participle, we
need to classify the verbs as regular and irregular.
Regular verbs will follow the same conjugation rules as those used to form the simple past.
In other words, the past participle will be formed by adding -ED, -IED or -D to the end of the
verb. Here are a few examples:

PAST PARTICIPLE
Regular Verbs: Add -ED, -IED, -D

to work worked to study studied


trabalhar trabalhado estudar estudado

to thank thanked to improve improved


agradecer agradecido melhorar melhorado

On the other hand, greater changes can occur with irregular verbs. Here is a list with some examples:

PAST PARTICIPLE
Irregular Verbs: No specific rule

to be been to have had


ser/estar sido/estado ter tido

to see seen to meet met


ver visto encontrar encontrado

< voltar para o índice


171
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Take a look at some examples:

PRESENT PERFE CT
Affirmative Form

subject + auxiliary verb have + main verb in the past participle + complement
sujeito + verbo auxiliar have + verbo principal no particípio passado + complemento

Both parties have developed a good relationship.


Ambas as partes desenvolveram um bom relacionamento.

Paul has studied since 5 a.m.


O Paul está estudando desde as 5h da manhã.

Jack has worked at the office for 10 years.


O Jack trabalha no escritório há 10 anos.

As you can see, all the previous examples follow the same general sentence structure, which is
subject + auxiliary verb have + main verb in the past participle + complement.
The interrogative form is quite simple. You just have to place the auxiliary verb in the
beginning of the sentence. Take a look:

PRESENT PERFE CT
Interrogative Form

auxiliary verb have + subject + main verb in the past participle + complement
verbo auxiliar have + sujeito + verbo principal no particípio passado + complemento

Has Jack tripled his commission in the last three years?


O Jack triplicou sua comissão nos últimos três anos?

Have Michael and Jane met the sales target?


O Michael e a Jane bateram a meta de vendas?

As you can see, regardless of the subject and the kind of verb, regular or irregular,
the sentence structure remains the same.
To make the negative form, we place not after the auxiliary verb, which still
agrees with the subject. Check it out:

< voltar para o índice


172
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

PRESENT PERFE CT
Negative Form

subject + auxiliary verb have + not + main verb in the past participle + complement
sujeito + verbo auxiliar have + not + verbo principal no particípio passado + complemento

I have not / haven’t seen Mary in a long time.


Eu não vejo a Mary há muito tempo.

Lucy has not / hasn’t thanked her boss for her promotion.
A Lucy não agradeceu à chefe dela pela promoção.

Notice that it is possible to contract the auxiliary verb with the particle not – have
not becomes haven’t, and has not becomes hasn’t.
We use the present perfect to refer to past actions that still have an influence
in the present, either for its effects or for its continuity. Most of the times, the
moment of the action is not relevant or not known. This is what differs this verb
form from the simple past. The simple past refers to actions that started and
finished at a definite time in the past.
However, there are some prepositions and adverbs that can be used with the
present perfect.
We can use since + a starting point in the past to refer to when the action has
begun. For example:

SINCE + A STARTING POINT IN THE PAST

Since July Since Sunday Since 1984


Desde julho Desde domingo Desde 1984

And we will use for + a period of time to express the duration of the action. For instance:

FOR + A PERIOD OF TIME

For six months For seven days For twenty years


Por seis meses Por sete dias Por vinte anos

< voltar para o índice


173
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Never is an adverb we can use. It places emphasis on a negative sentence stated


in the present perfect. Check it out:

ADVERBS OF TIME
Never

Jack has never tripled his commission.


O Jack nunca triplicou sua comissão.

Jack has not never tripled his commission.

Note that we cannot use a double negative, that is, we cannot use never in a
negative sentence. In order to use never for emphasis, the sentence must be in
the affirmative form. Besides, note that its position in the sentence will usually
be before the main verb.
Another adverb we can use to add emphasis is ever. It means at least once in
life or at some point in the past. Ever is mostly used in questions or in negative
sentences. Take a look at the example:

ADVERBS OF TIME

Has Mary ever had Japanese?


A Mary já comeu comida japonesa alguma vez?

Here, we wish to know if Mary has eaten this type of food at any moment in her
life. We could also use before in this sentence and ask:

ADVERBS OF TIME

Has Mary had Japanese before?


A Mary já comeu comida japonesa antes?

If the answer to this question is negative, we could say:

PRESENT PERFE CT

Mary hasn’t had Japanese food.


Mary não comeu comida japonesa.

< voltar para o índice


174
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

However, it will be quite common to answer this type of question using an


affirmative sentence and emphasizing it with never. Observe:

ADVERBS OF TIME

Has Mary ever had Japanese?


A Mary já comeu comida japonesa alguma vez?

Mary has never had Japanese food.


A Mary nunca comeu comida japonesa.

Another common adverb used with the present perfect is yet. It is used in
negative sentences to say that something has not happened until now. Observe
the following examples and compare the uses of ever, before, never, and yet:

ADVERBS OF TIME

Have Linda and Carl ever been to France? / Have Linda and Carl
been to France before?
A Linda e o Carl já foram para a França alguma vez? / A Linda e o Carl
já foram para a França antes?

They have never been to France.


Eles nunca foram à França.

They have not been to France yet.


Eles ainda não foram à França.

Have they been to France yet?


Eles já foram à França?

Notice the use of the adverb yet. In the negative, it means not until this moment, and it
implies that something might happen in the future. In other words, if you say that something
has not happened yet, it becomes implicit that it will eventually happen. However, if you use it
in an interrogative sentence, yet means until the present moment. So, in a timeline, it points
towards the past.
As you saw, yet is usually placed at the end of the sentence, regardless if it is a negative or an
interrogative one.
In affirmative sentences, you will not use yet if you want to state that something has
happened. In such case, you will use already. Take a look:

< voltar para o índice


175
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

ADVERBS OF TIME

Linda and Carl have already been to France.


A Linda e o Carl já foram à França.

Already may even imply that a situation has happened before expected.
Just is another adverb often used in sentences in the present perfect. Observe the
example:

ADVERBS OF TIME

They have just arrived from France.


Eles acabaram de chegar da França. / Eles chegaram da França
recentemente.

Notice that just conveys the idea that something happened only a short time
ago. It will be placed between the auxiliary verb and the main verb when used
in sentences in the present perfect.

In this chapter, you have learned and reviewed the use of different ways to talk
about the past: the simple past and the present perfect. You have also learned
how to use some adverbs of time. If you want to learn more about these topics,
you can refer to the Grammar Guide section at the end of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Adverbs of Time Page 183


Irregular Verbs - Past Participle Page 197
Present Perfect Page 220
Simple Past – Other Verbs Page 243
Simple Past – Verb To Be Page 249

< voltar para o índice


176
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

Part 5.

Activities
A. Complete the chart with the correct form of the verbs.

Infinitive Simple Past Past Participle


to be was / were 1.
to have 2. had
to improve 3. improved
to meet met 4.
to see saw 5.
to study 6. studied
to thank thanked 7.
to work 8. worked

B. Fill in the blanks with the missing adverbs:

1. Linda and Carl have been to France.


A Linda e o Carl já foram à França.

2. They have arrived from France.


Eles acabaram de chegar da França.

3. Have they been to France ?


Eles já foram à França?

4. Have Linda and Carl been to France?


A Linda e o Carl foram à França alguma vez?

< voltar para o índice


177
Chapter 7 Video Script Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

5. They have been to France.


Eles nunca foram à França.

5. never

8. since
6. They have not been to France .

Activity B – Answers

6. yet
7. for
Eles ainda não foram à França.

1. already

4. ever
2. just
7. They have traveled six months.

3. yet
Eles viajaram por seis meses.

7. thanked
8. worked
6. studied
5. seen
Activity A – Answers
8. They have been together 1985.
Eles estão juntos desde 1985.

3. improved
1. been

4. met
2. had

< voltar para o índice


178
Grammar Guide.
Adjectives
Adjectives are used to describe ADJE CTIVES
things. We can use adjectives to Subject + Verb + Adjective
describe objects, people, places,
the weather, and food, for example.
Mary is smart.
Adjectives don’t have singular Mary é esperta.
or plural forms or feminine and (subject: Mary + verb: is + adjective: smart)
masculine, and they always refer
to nouns or pronouns. John is smart.
Adjectives are used mainly in two John é esperto.
positions. In the first one, a noun or a (subject: John + verb: is + adjective: smart)
pronoun is the subject of the sentence,
followed by the verb and the adjective. Mary and John are smart.
Mary e John são espertos.
(subject: Mary and John + verb: are + adjective: smart)

The other position for adjectives is right before the noun to which they refer.
In this case, we’ll have a determiner (if necessary), the adjective and the noun.
Take a look:

ADJE CTIVES
(Determiner) + Adjective + Noun

Mary has a great job.


Mary tem um ótimo emprego.
(determiner: a + adjective: great + noun: job)

John has a great job.


John tem um ótimo emprego.
(determiner: a + adjective: great + noun: job)

Mary and John have great jobs.


Mary e John têm ótimos empregos.
( no determiner + adjective: great + noun: job)

< voltar para o índice


180
In this second structure, it’s possible to use a determiner or not. But what is a determiner?
A determiner can be an article, such as the, a, or an; a demonstrative, such as this, that,
these, or those; or a possessive adjective, such as my, your, his, her, its, our, or their.

DE TERMINERS

Article: the/a/an
Artigo: o(a) / um(a)

Demonstratives: this; these / that; those


Pronomes demonstrativos: este(a), esse(a); estes(as) esses(as) / aquele(a); aqueles(as)

Possessive adjectives: my / your / his / her / its / our / their


Pronomes possessivos: meu(s); minha(s) / teu(s); tua(s); seu(s); sua(s) /
seu; sua; dele; dela / nosso(s); nossa(s) / seus; suas; deles; delas

Let’s see some examples with determiners before the adjective and the noun.

ADJE CTIVES
(Determiner) + Adjective + Noun

Chris is the best student in the class.


Chris é o melhor aluno da sala.
(determiner: the + adjective: best + noun: student)

Look at those cute dogs!


Olha aqueles cachorros fofos!
(determiner: those + adjective: cute + noun: dogs)

Chocolate is my favorite dessert.


Chocolate é minha sobremesa favorita.
(determiner: my + adjective: favorite + noun: dessert)

< voltar para o índice


181
It’s possible to use two or more adjectives in a sentence. Look at the example:

ADJE CTIVES

Carnival is a beautiful big old festival.


O Carnaval é uma grande e bonita festa antiga.
(determiner: a + adjectives: beautiful, big, and old + noun: festival)

When you use more than one adjective in a sentence, there is an order to be followed. Check it out:

ADJE CTIVE ORDER

1st – Opinion 2nd – Size


Example: Amazing, beautiful, nice. Example: Big, small, tall, short.
Exemplo: Incrível, bonito(a), legal. Exemplo: Grande, pequeno(a), alto(a), baixo(a).

3rd – Physical characteristics 4th – Shape


Example: Thin, tall, short. Example: Round, square, rectangular.
Exemplo: Magro(a), alto(a), baixo(a). Exemplo: Redondo(a), quadrado(a), retangular.

5th – Age 6th – Color


Example: Old and young. Example: Blue, red, yellow.
Exemplo: Velho(a) e novo(a). Exemplo: Azul, vermelho(a), amarelo(a).

3rd – Physical characteristics 8th – Material


Example: Japanese, Italian, American. Example: Wooden, plastic, glass.
Exemplo: Japonês(esa), Italiano(a), Americano(a). Exemplo: De madeira, de plástico, de vidro.

9th – Type 10th – Purpose


Example: General, specific. Example: Cooking, cleaning, teaching.
Exemplo: Geral, específico(a). Exemplo: Para cozinhar, limpar, ensinar.

It’s not common to use many adjectives for the same noun, but it’s possible.

This is how adjectives are used in English.

< voltar para o índice


182
Adverbs of Time
Adverbs are words that modify a verb, an adjective, another adverb, phrases,
or sentences. They answer questions such as where, when, how long, how
likely, or to what degree. They are classified as manner, place, time, frequency,
certainty, degree, comparative, and superlative adverbs.
We’ll now focus on the adverbs of time, which are used to say when something
happens.

ADVERBS OF TIME

now yesterday
agora ontem

tomorrow today
amanhã hoje

before ago
antes atrás

already soon
já em breve

after tonight
depois hoje à noite

yet early/earlier
ainda cedo / mais cedo

recently lately
recentemente ultimamente

finally late/later
finalmente tarde / mais tarde

< voltar para o índice


183
Check examples with some of these adverbs.

ADVERBS OF TIME

I need to talk to you now.


Eu preciso falar com você agora.

The boarding will soon take place at gate 38.


O embarque acontecerá em breve pelo portão 38.

I’ll call you later.


Eu vou te ligar mais tarde.

Adverbs of time may tell us which day we are talking about.

ADVERBS OF TIME

I have a busy day today.


Eu tenho um dia ocupado hoje.

Yesterday we went to the movies.


Ontem, nós fomos ao cinema.

I have an important meeting tomorrow.


Eu tenho uma reunião importante amanhã.

To refer to the time an action ADVERBIAL PHRASES


happens, it’s very common to use
adverbial phrases, which are phrases
that work as adverbs and indicate time. So, our meeting is next Friday.
You can build adverbial phrases with Então, a nossa reunião é na próxima sexta.
next, this, and last, for example.

Our meeting is this Friday.


A nossa reunião é nesta sexta.

Our meeting was last Friday.


A nossa reunião foi na sexta passada.

< voltar para o índice


184
Check out some other examples of adverbial phrases.

ADVERBIAL PHRASES

Past Present Future

in the past at this moment in the future


no passado neste momento no futuro

a long time ago right now some years from now


há muito tempo agora mesmo daqui a alguns anos

once upon a time at this very moment in a distant future


era uma vez neste exato momento em um futuro distante

Now you know how to refer to the past, present,


and future using different adverbs.

< voltar para o índice


185
Comparatives
In English, one of the ways we can compare things is using the comparative
form of adjectives and adverbs. We can use them to compare two things, ideas,
or people, and to determine if one has more or less of a particular quality than the
other.
Adjectives qualify nouns. Adverbs qualify verbs. But they can have the same
form. That is what happens with fast, for example. It can be either an adjective or
an adverb—but regardless of its function, there will be a comparative form.

ORDINAL NUMBERS
Order of things or events

This car is faster than that one.


Esse carro é mais rápido do que aquele.
(The adjective faster refers to the noun car.)

Can you drive faster?


Você pode dirigir mais rápido?
(The adverb faster refers to the verb drive.)

There are basically two structures to use the comparative form of adjectives and
adverbs. One is when we have a short adverb or adjective. In these cases, we’ll
add -ER at the end of the adjective or adverb.
When we mention the two elements, we also use than right after the
comparative form.

COMPARATIVE ADJE CTIVES AND ADVERBS


Short Adjective or Adverb

Adjective/Adverb + -ER + Than (if necessary)

Julie looks younger now.


A Julie parece mais nova agora.

Julie is younger than her brother.


A Julie é mais nova do que seu irmão.

< voltar para o índice


186
The other structure is for long adverbs or adjectives. In that case, we’ll use more
before it. The rule for using the word than is the same. If we mention the element
of comparison, we’ll use it.

COMPARATIVE ADJE CTIVES AND ADVERBS


Long Adjective or Adverb

More + Long Adjective/Adverb + Than (if necessary)

The airfares are more expensive today.


As tarifas aéreas estão mais caras hoje.

The airfares are more expensive than last week.


As tarifas aéreas estão mais caras do que na semana passada.

Short adjectives are the ones that have one syllable, and they have some spelling rules that
must be observed. In most cases, we simply add -ER.

COMPARATIVES – ONE-SYLL ABLE ADJE CTIVES AND ADVERBS


Most cases: Add -ER

Adjective/Adverb Comparative Adjective/Adverb

young younger
jovem mais jovem

strong stronger
forte mais forte

high higher
alto mais alto

< voltar para o índice


187
However, for the short adjectives or adverbs ending in E, we just need to add -R.

COMPARATIVES
One-syllable Adjectives and Adverbs – Special Cases

Ending in E: Add -R
Terminação em E: Adicionar -R

Adjective/Adverb Comparative Adjective/Adverb

nice nicer
legal mais legal

wise wiser
sábio mais sábio

Regarding the short adjectives and adverbs ending in Y,


we will drop the Y and add -IER.

COMPARATIVES
One-syllable Adjectives and Adverbs – Special Cases

Ending in Y: Replace Y for -IER


Terminação em Y: Trocar o Y por -IER

Adjective/Adverb Comparative Adjective/Adverb

dry drier
seco mais seco

shy shier
tímido mais tímido

< voltar para o índice


188
Some short adjectives and adverbs are known as CVC because they are
composed of or end in consonant, vowel, consonant. It’s the case of hot
and big. For these, we double the last consonant and add -ER.

COMPARATIVES
One-syllable Adjectives and Adverbs – Special Cases

Ending in CVC: Double the last consonant and add -ER


Terminação em CVC: Dobrar a última consoante e adicionar -ER

Adjective/Adverb Comparative Adjective/Adverb

hot hotter
quente mais quente

big bigger
grande maior

The comparative of most two-syllable adjectives and adverbs will be formed by


using the word more before them.
But there are some exceptions. If the two-syllable adjectives or adverbs end in
Y, we drop the Y and add –IER, and when they finish in E or OW, we’ll add -ER.

COMPARATIVES
Two-syllable Adjectives and Adverbs – Special Cases

Ending in Y: Replace Y for -IER Ending in E or OW: Add -ER


Terminação em Y: Trocar Y por -IER Terminação em E ou OW: Adicionar -ER

easy easier polite politer


fácil mais fácil educado mais educado

busy busier simple simpler


ocupado mais ocupado simples mais simples

happy happier narrow narrower


feliz mais feliz estreito mais estreito

shallow shallower
raso mais raso

< voltar para o índice


189
For long adjectives and adverbs, which is the general case of those with two or three
or more syllables, we’ll just use the word more before them.

COMPARATIVES
Long Adjectives and Adverbs

Adjective Colorful Adverb Carefully


This painting is more colorful than that one. You drive more carefully than Mark.
Esse quadro é mais colorido do que aquele. Você dirige mais cuidadosamente do que o Mark

There are also some irregular comparative forms that do not fit the rules.

COMPARATIVES
Irregular Adjectives and Adverbs

Ending in CVC: Double the last consonant and add -ER


Terminação em CVC: Dobrar a última consoante e adicionar -ER

Adjective/Adverb Comparative Adjective/Adverb


Good/Well Better
Bad/Badly Worse
Far Farther/Further
Little Less

Now, when we want to say that two COMPARATIVES


elements are equal, the structure is Equality
as + adjective/adverb + as. In such
case, we’ll always use the adjective or
adverb in their base form. Structure: as + adjective/adverb + as

This restaurant is as good as the one we went to yesterday.


Este restaurante é tão bom quanto o que fomos ontem.

Mary dances as gracefully as Jane.


Mary dança tão graciosamente quanto Jane.

And now you know how to make comparisons in English using adjectives and adverbs.

< voltar para o índice


190
Conditionals
Conditionals are sentences that talk about known facts or hypothetical
situations and their consequences. In these sentences, something must happen
first so that another thing happens. Conditionals usually contain an if-clause,
which is the conditional clause, and another cause stating the consequence.
When the clause that gives us one condition, that is, the if-clause, comes first, we
place a comma right after it. But the if-clause can also come after the main clause;
then, there is no comma.

CONDITIONALS

If I had money, I would travel the world.


Se eu tivesse dinheiro, eu viajaria pelo mundo.
(The condition is “If I had money” and the
consequence is “I would travel the world.”)
(A condição é “Se eu tivesse dinheiro”, e a
consequência é “eu viajaria pelo mundo”.)

I’ll go to the beach tomorrow if the weather is good.


Eu irei à praia amanhã se o tempo estiver bom.
(The consequence is “I’ll go to the beach tomorrow”
and the condition is “if the weather is good.”)
(A consequência é “Eu irei à praia amanhã”,
e a condição é “se o tempo estiver bom”.)

There are four types of conditional sentences. Each type of conditional expresses
a degree of probability for a situation to happen. We call them zero conditional,
first conditional, second conditional, and third conditional.
Zero conditionals are used to talk about general truths, which means one thing
will always cause a specific consequence. The verb form used in both clauses is
the simple present.

< voltar para o índice


191
ZERO CONDITIONAL
General Truths

If Clause Main Clause


If (When) + Simple Present Simple Present

If you cool water to zero degrees, it turns into ice.


Se você resfriar a água a zero grau, ela vira gelo.
(It is a scientific fact; so, the result of the conditional clause will always be true.)
(É um fato científico; portanto, o resultado da oração condicional será sempre
verdadeiro.)

When you smoke, you harm your health.


Quando você fuma, você prejudica a sua saúde.
(This consequence is also true, regardless of the circumstances.)
(Essa consequência também é verdadeira, independente das circunstâncias.)

The first conditional is used when the result is likely to happen. In this conditional, we use the if-clause in
the simple present and the main clause with will or another modal verb used to express future ideas.

FIRST CONDITIONAL
Likely future results

If-clause Main Clause


If + Present Will/May/Can/Could/Should + Infinitive

If you study, you will do well on the exam. If you study, you may do well on the exam.
Se você estudar, você se sairá bem na prova. Se você estudar, você pode se sair bem na prova.
(A future situation we believe to be possible). Se você estudar, pode ser que se saia bem na prova.
(You are likely to reach the outcome).

If you go on a diet, you’ll lose weight. If you go on a diet, you can lose weight.
Se você fizer uma dieta, perderá peso. Se você fizer uma dieta, você pode perder peso.
(A future situation we believe to be possible). (If you fulfil the condition, it’s a possible future).

< voltar para o índice


192
The second conditionals is used to talk about unrealistic consequences or things that are not
likely to happen. For this conditional, we use the If-clause in the simple past and the main clause
frequently with the modal verb would. The main sentence expresses the unlikelihood that the
result will actually happen, so the modal verbs could and might are also used.

SE COND CONDITIONAL
Unrealistic Consequence

If-clause Main Clause


If + Past Would/Could/Might + Infinitive

If I had a billion dollars, I would go to Mars.


If I had a billion dollars, I could go to Mars.
Se eu tivesse um bilhão de dólares, eu iria para Marte.
Se eu tivesse um bilhão de dólares, eu poderia ir para Marte.

If I were you, I would call her.


Se eu fosse você, eu ligaria para ela.

The third conditional is used to say that if something had happened in the past, the present
would be different. These sentences express a condition that was likely to happen, but it
didn’t, and it might imply an idea of regret.
In this conditional, the if-clause is in the past perfect and the main clause is formed by a
modal verb that expresses past probability or hypothetical situations in the past, such as
could, should, and would + have + the main verb in the past participle.

THIRD CONDITIONAL
A condition that was likely to happen, but didn’t

If-clause Main Clause


If + Past Perfect Modal + Perfect

If you had told me you needed help, I could have helped you.
Se você tivesse me dito que precisava de ajuda, eu poderia ter lhe ajudado.

If you had left home earlier, you would have arrived on time.
Se você tivesse saído de casa mais cedo, teria chegado no horário.

Now you know what a conditional is and the most common types of
conditionals as well as the structures and use.

< voltar para o índice


193
Interrogative Form
Interrogative sentences in English follow some basic structures.
In a sentence with the verb to be as the main verb in the simple present or the
simple past, there is no need to use an auxiliary verb. Therefore, the sentence
will have the following structure: the verb to be as the main verb, the subject,
and the complement.
Sentences that have one auxiliary or modal verb are made by placing the
auxiliary right before the subject, and then the main verb, which may be
followed by a complement.
In the case of verb forms that have more than one auxiliary, the structure is the
first auxiliary verb, the subject, and then the second or third auxiliary verbs,
followed by the main the verb and a complement, if necessary.

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES
Structures

Verb To Be + Subject + Complement (Simple Present and Simple Past)


Verbo To Be + Sujeito + Complemento (Simple Present and Simple Past)

Auxiliary or Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb + Complement (if necessary)


Verbo Auxiliar ou Modal Verb + Sujeito + Verbo Principal + Complemento (se necessário)

First Auxiliary Verb + Subject + Other Auxiliaries + Main Verb +


Complement (if necessary)
Primeiro Verbo Auxiliar + Sujeito + Outros Auxiliares + Verbo Principal +
Complemento (se necessário)

< voltar para o índice


194
Check out some examples with these structures. In verb forms such as the simple present and
the simple past, in which the verb to be is the main verb, we don’t need an auxiliary to ask a
question.

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES
Verb forms with the verb to be as the main verb (simple present and simple past)

Structure: Verb To Be + Subject + Complement

Is she a lawyer?
Ela é advogada?

Were you home last night?


Você estava em casa na noite passada?

However, in the case of verb forms in which the main verb is not
the verb to be, one auxiliary verb or a modal verb is required.

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES
Verb forms with other verbs as the main verb

Structure: Auxiliary Verb + Subject + Main Verb + Complement (if necessary)

Does she work as a lawyer? ( main verb: work)


Ela trabalha como advogada?
(The verb to do works as an auxiliary, and the sentence is in the simple present)

Did you do your homework? ( main verb: do)


Você fez sua lição de casa?
(The verb to do works as an auxiliary, and the sentence is in the simple past)

Can you help me? ( main verb: help)


Você pode me ajudar?
(The modal verb can works as an auxiliary, and the sentence is in the simple present)

Are you studying for the test? ( main verb: study in the -ING form)
Você está estudando para a prova?
(The verb to be works as an auxiliary, and the sentence is in the present continuous)

< voltar para o índice


195
Depending on the verb form, there may be more than one auxiliary verb before the main verb, which is
the case of the present perfect continuous.

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES
Verbs forms with more than one auxiliary verb

Structure: First Auxiliary Verb + Subject + Other Auxiliaries +


Main Verb + Complement (if necessary)

Have you been studying for the test? ( main verb: study in the -ING form)
Você tem estudado para a prova?
(The verb to have works as the first auxiliary, and the verb to be in the past participle, as the second)

Have you been waiting for a long time? ( main verb: wait in the -ING form)
Você está esperando há muito tempo?
(The verb to have works as the first auxiliary, and the verb to be in the past participle, as the second)

Notice that in English when someone asks a question using auxiliaries, we can give a long or a short
answer, and to give a short answer we need to use the auxiliary verb.

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES
Long and short answers

Question Full Answer Short Answer Wrong Answer

Do you like chocolate? Yes, I like chocolate. Yes, I do. Yes, I like.
Você gosta de chocolate? Sim, eu gosto de chocolate. Sim, eu gosto.

And this is how we use the interrogative form in English.


Now, you know its basic sentence structure.

< voltar para o índice


196
Irregular Verbs -
Past Participle
In this grammar guide, we’ll tackle irregular verbs in the past participle. It’s important to
highlight that, among the most commonly used verbs in English, there are only about 200
irregular verbs. That means that most of the verbs are regular.
But although there aren’t many irregular verbs in English, it’s fair to say that they deserve some
special attention, since there is not a pattern that applies to all of them.
In English, the past participle is used with some perfect forms in the active voice, namely the
present perfect, the past perfect, the future perfect, and modal verbs + perfect, and it is also
used with all the verb forms in the passive voice.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Perfect Forms

I’ve seen so many beautiful places. I couldn’t have chosen just one to write about.
Eu vi muitos lugares bonitos. Eu não poderia ter escolhido escrever sobre apenas um.
(seen = past participle of to see; chosen = past participle of to choose)

Check some examples in the passive voice:

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Passive Voice

The tradition was kept by many people around the country.


A tradição foi mantida por muitas pessoas ao redor do país.

She was chosen as the employee of the month.


Ela foi escolhida a funcionária do mês.

If you want to learn more about the perfect forms or the passive voice, check the grammar
guides on these topics. They both use the past participle, and that’s why it’s important to focus
on this topic.

< voltar para o índice


197
The regular verbs in the past participle follow the same pattern of the past forms.
As for the irregular verbs, some of them will keep the same form as the one used for
the past, some of them will keep the base form—although they might differ from the
past form—and others will have a totally different form.
In the first case, the verbs have the same form for the past and past participle
grouped by phonological patterns.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Past = Past Participle

Base Form Past Past Participle

Keep Kept Kept


Manter

Sleep Slept Slept


Dormir

Meet Met Met


Encontrar, conhecer

The same rule applies for the verbs to mean, to read, and to hear, for example.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Past = Past Participle

Base Form Past Past Participle

Mean Meant Meant


Significar

Read Read Read


Ler

Hear Heard Heard


Ouvir

< voltar para o índice


198
In the same group, we’ll find the verbs to find, to bring, and to think, which will have
the same form in the past and in the past participle.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Past = Past Participle

Base Form Past Past Participle

Find Found Found


Encontrar, achar

Bring Brought Brought


Trazer

Think Thought Thought


Pensar, achar

Verbs ending in -ELL change to -OLD and keep the same form in the
past and past participle.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Past = Past Participle

Base Form Past Past Participle

Sell Sold Sold


Vender

Tell Told Told


Dizer, contar

< voltar para o índice


199
There is a group of verbs that do not change their base forms in the past.
This group will also keep the same form in the past participle.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Keep the same form

Base Form Past Past Participle

Bet Bet Bet


Apostar

Cut Cut Cut


Cortar

Hurt Hurt Hurt


Machucar

Another group of verbs will undergo some changes in their past forms, but their past
participle forms are spelled and pronounced just like their base forms.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Base form = Past Participle

Base Form Past Past Participle

Come Came Come


Vir

Run Ran Run


Correr

Become Became Become


Tornar-se

< voltar para o índice


200
Moreover, there is a group of verbs that have three different forms. Check some examples grouped
according to phonological patterns as we did with the first group.
To make the past participle of some verbs, we’ll repeat the same form of the past and add -N or -EN.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Past Participle = Past + -N or -EN

Base Form Past Past Participle

Break Broke Broken


Quebrar

Choose Chose Chosen


Escolher

Get Got Gotten


Pegar, conseguir

For some others, we’ll add -N or -EN to the base form to make the past participle,
and they may change the pronunciation of the stressed vowel.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Base form = Past Participle

Base Form Past Past Participle

Drive Drove Driven


Dirigir

Ride Rode Ridden


Montar

Write Wrote Written


Escrever

Eat Ate Eaten


Comer

Fall Fell Fallen


Cair

Forbid Forbade Forbidden


Proibir

< voltar para o índice


201
Some verbs that end in -EW in the past, will have their endings changed
to -OWN in the past participle.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS


Past (-EW) = Past Participle (-OWN)

Base Form Past Past Participle

Grow Grew Grown


Crescer

Know Knew Known


Saber, conhecer

Fly Flew Flown


Voar

The highly frequent verbs to be, to do, and to go also have different forms.
Check it on the table.
Notice that there are two different past forms for the verb to be, but there
is only one for the past participle, which is been.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRRE GUL AR VERBS

Base Form Past Past Participle

Be Was/Were Been
Ser, estar

Do Did Done
Fazer

Go Went Gone
Ir

And now you know the past participle of irregular verbs, when to use it,
as well as how to use it in the active and passive voices.

< voltar para o índice


202
Modal Verb Can
Modal verbs function as auxiliary verbs, adding meaning to the main verb.
Modal verbs express possibility, probability, ability, permission, assumption,
obligation, or prohibition.
Modal verbs have the same sentence structure. In the affirmative, the structure
is the subject, the modal verb followed by the main verb in the base form, and
it can be followed by a complement or not.

MODAL VERBS
Affirmative Form

I can drive.
Eu posso dirigir.
(subject: I + modal verb: can + main verb: drive)

I can play the piano.


Eu posso tocar piano.
(subject: I + modal verb: can + main verb: play + complement: the piano)

In negative sentences, we keep the same pattern, but include NOT after the
modal verb. We generally use the contracted form can’t.

MODAL VERBS
Negative Form

I can’t drive.
Eu não posso dirigir.
(subject: I + modal verb: can + not (can’t) + main verb: drive)

I can’t play the piano.


Eu não posso tocar piano.
(subject: I + modal verb: can + not (can’t) + main verb: play +
complement: the piano)

< voltar para o índice


203
In interrogative sentences, we invert the position of the modal verb and the subject.
The structure is the modal verb, the subject, the main verb in the base form, and a
complement, when necessary.

MODAL VERBS
Interrogative Form

Can you drive?


Você pode dirigir?
( modal verb: can + subject: you + main verb: drive)

Can you play the piano?


Você pode tocar piano?
( modal verb: can + subject: you + main verb: play + complement: the piano)

The modal verb can in its affirmative form typically expresses possibility, present ability,
and permission. In the negative form, it expresses lack of possibility, lack of ability, and lack
of permission.

MODAL VERBS
Uses

Affirmative Negative

Possibility Lack of Possibility


I can meet you later. I can’t meet you later.
Eu posso te encontrar mais tarde. Eu não posso te encontrar mais tarde.

Present Ability Lack of Ability


I can dance very well. I can’t dance very well.
Eu posso/sei dançar muito bem. Eu não posso/sei dançar muito bem.

Permission Lack of Permission


You can come in. You can’t come in.
Você pode entrar. Você não pode entrar.

< voltar para o índice


204
As for the interrogative form, the modal verb can is typically used to
make requests. It’s used to ask for favors and for permission, or to
ask about the possibility of something happening.

MODAL VERB CAN


Uses

Interrogative

Asking a Favor
Can you help me?
Eu não posso te encontrar mais tarde.

Asking for Permission


Can I come in?
Eu não posso/sei dançar muito bem.

Asking about Possiblity


Can we meet after work?
Você não pode entrar.

It’s important to acknowledge that these uses are usually easily noticed within the context, since the same
sentence in different contexts may have different meanings.

MODAL VERB CAN


Contexts

You can speak English. You have the ability to speak English.
Você pode/sabe falar inglês. Você tem habilidade para falar inglês.

It’s possible for you to speak English in a certain situation.


É possível que você fale inglês em determinada situação.

You have permission to speak English in a certain situation.


Você tem permissão para falar inglês em determinada situação.

And this is how you use the modal verb can.

< voltar para o índice


205
Modal Verb Could
Modal verbs are also known as modal auxiliary verbs because they add
meaning to the main verb. Modal verbs can express possibility, probability,
ability, permission, assumption, obligation, or prohibition.
Modal verbs follow the same sentence structure. Let’s look at structures
in the affirmative, negative, and interrogative forms.
In the affirmative, the structure is the subject, the modal verb, and the main
verb in the base form, which may be followed by a complement or not.
Take a look at the table.

MODAL VERBS
Affirmative

Subject + Modal Verb + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement

We could go to the gym.


Nós poderíamos ir à academia.

In negative sentences, we’ll include the word not after the modal verb.
When we use the negative form, we generally use the contracted form couldn’t.

MODAL VERBS
Negative

Subject + Modal Verb + Not + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement

We couldn’t go to the gym.


Nós não pudemos ir à academia.

< voltar para o índice


206
To make interrogative sentences, the modal verb is placed before the subject.

MODAL VERBS
Interrogative

Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement

Could we go to the gym together?


Nós poderíamos ir à academia juntos?

It’s important to notice that modal verbs in general should be associated with their functions in the context,
and not with time ( past, present or future). This is particularly important when analyzing the modal verb
could, since the time reference may change drastically according to its function in the context.
The modal verb could in its affirmative and negative forms can be used to express probability or lack of
probability, either of a present or a future event. It can also refer to abilities, but in such case, could refers to
past abilities.

MODAL VERB COULD


Probability / Lack of Probability (in the Present)

Mary is not home right now. She’s usually at her parents’ in the morning. She could be there.
Mary não está em casa agora. Ela geralmente está na casa de seus pais de manhã. Ela pode estar lá.
(She could be there = It’s possible that she is there)

Mary’s parents are out of town. She couldn’t be there.


Os pais da Mary estão fora da cidade. Ela não poderia estar lá.
(She couldn’t be there = It’s not possible for her to be there)

We can also use the modal verb could to talk about probability in the future, that is, the chances for
something to happen.

MODAL VERB COULD


Probability / Lack of Probability (in the Future)

Sylvia is an excellent professional. I think she could be the new manager.


A Sylvia é uma profissional excelente. Eu acho que ela poderia ser a nova gerente.
(She could be the new manager = It’s likely to happen)

Brian is just as good. But he couldn’t be the new manager; he has no management skills.
Brian é tão bom quanto ela. Mas ele não poderia ser o novo gerente; ele não tem habilidades gerenciais.
(He couldn’t be the new manager = It’s not likely to happen)

< voltar para o índice


207
However, when we use the modal verb could to refer to ability, we are referring to abilities
people had in the past, and that they probably don’t have anymore, or, in the case of negative
sentences, abilities people didn’t have in the past.

MODAL VERB COULD


Ability / Lack of Ability (in the Past)

Kevin won a lot of football tournaments back in our school days. Boy, he could run!
Kevin ganhou muitos torneios de futebol americano na época de escola. Cara, como ele
sabia/podia correr!

George was a good player, but he couldn’t run long distances.


George era um bom jogador, mas ele não sabia/podia correr distâncias longas.

The modal verb could in the interrogative form is used to ask about possibilities
or abilities in the past.

MODAL VERB COULD

Could you meet me at the coffee shop tomorrow?


Você poderia me encontrar no café amanhã?
(Asking about possibilities for the future)

Could you speak English by the time you lived abroad?


Você podia/sabia falar inglês quando morou fora?
(Asking about past ability in the past)

In the interrogative, the modal verb could is also very frequently used to make
requests in a polite way, either asking for a favor or for permission.

MODAL VERB COULD


Making Requests

Could you lend me your car?


Você poderia me emprestar o seu carro?

Could I borrow your car?


Eu poderia pegar o seu carro emprestado?

And now you know how to use the modal verb could.

< voltar para o índice


208
Modal Verb May
Modal verbs are also known as modal auxiliary verbs because they add meaning
to the main verb. Modal verbs can express possibility, probability, ability,
permission, assumption, obligation, or prohibition.
The sentence structure of modal verbs follows the same pattern:

MODAL VERBS
Sentence Structure

Affirmative Form

Subject + Modal Verb + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)

Negative Form

Subject + Modal Verb + Not + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Not + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)

Interrogative Form

Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Modal Verb + Sujeito + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)

< voltar para o índice


209
The modal verb may can be used to express probability.
In such cases, we are saying that something is likely to happen, that there’s a
chance that something will happen. For example:

MODAL VERB MAY


Expressing Probability

It may rain.
Pode chover. / Pode ser que chova.
(There is a reasonable chance that it will rain).

I may go to the party.


Eu posso ir à festa. / Pode ser que eu vá à festa.
(There is a reasonable chance that I will go to the party).

She may be at home.


Ela pode estar em casa. / Pode ser que ela esteja em casa.
(There is a reasonable chance that she will be home).

The modal verb may can also be used to say that there
is a chance that something does not happen.
In this case, we use it in the negative form. Take a look:

MODAL VERB MAY


Expressing Unlikely Things

I may not be the best student in class, but I’m very dedicated.
Eu posso não ser o melhor aluno da turma, mas eu sou muito dedicado.

Be careful with the pieces of news you read on social media. They may not be true.
Tenha cuidado com notícias que você lê nas redes sociais. Elas podem não ser verdadeiras.

Researchers may not be able to find the cure to some diseases,


but they’ve been doing their best.
Pesquisadores podem (até) não ser capazes de achar a cura para algumas doenças,
mas eles têm dado o melhor de si.

< voltar para o índice


210
It is rare to see may in the interrogative form to give the idea of probability.
The interrogative form is used as a formal way to ask for permission. In such
cases, may is used in questions in the first person, either singular or plural.

MODAL VERB MAY


Asking for Permission

Excuse me, Ms. Sullivan. May I come in?


Com licença, senhora Sullivan. Eu posso entrar?
(May I come in? = First person singular – I).

May we talk to you for a minute, sir?


Nós podemos falar com senhor por um minuto?
(May we talk…? = First person plural – We).

When we ask for permission, the interrogative form can only be used in the first person.
However, when we answer these permission requests, that is, when we give permission or not, we will use
the affirmative or the negative forms in the second person. Have a look:

MODAL VERB MAY


Giving Permission (or not)

Asking for permission: Excuse me, Ms. Sullivan. May I come in?
Com licença, senhora Sullivan. Eu posso entrar?
Giving permission, or not: Yes, you may come in. / No, you may not come in.
Sim, você pode entrar. / Não, você não pode entrar.

Asking for permission: May we talk to you for a minute, sir?


Nós podemos falar com o senhor por um minuto?
Giving permission, or not: Yes, you may. / No, you may not.
Sim, vocês podem. / Não, vocês não podem.

And now you know how to use the modal verb may.

< voltar para o índice


211
Modal Verb Might
Modal verbs, also known as modal auxiliary verbs, add meaning to the main
verb. Modals can express possibility, probability, ability, permission, assumption,
obligation, or prohibition.
The modal verb might is mainly used to say that there’s a weak probability that
something will happen, except in the interrogative form.

MODAL VERB
Structure

Affirmative
Subject + Modal Verb + Main Verb (Base Form) +
Complement (if necessary)

We might go to Paris in the holiday season.


Pode ser que nós vamos para Paris na temporada de férias.
É possível que nós vamos para Paris na temporada de férias.
Há uma pequena chance de nós irmos para Paris na temporada de férias.

Negative
Subject + Modal Verb + NOT + Main Verb (Base Form) +
Complement (if necessary)

I might not go to the party.


Pode ser que eu não vá à festa.
É possível que eu não vá à festa.
É pouco provável que eu vá à festa.

Interrogative
Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb (Base Form) +
Complement (if necessary)

Might I ask you a question?


Eu poderia fazer uma pergunta a você?

< voltar para o índice


212
Questions with might are used when we want to ask for permission in formal contexts.
But it is important to note that the modal verb may has this same function in the interrogative
form, and it is usually preferred.
Now, let’s see the uses of the modal verb might.
Might can be used to express probability when we want to express that we believe
something is not really likely to happen, so there’s a small chance, it’s a slight probability.

MODAL VERB – MIGHT


Uses

I might be wrong, but I don’t think that’s a good decision.


Pode ser que eu esteja errado, mas eu não acho essa uma boa decisão.
É possível que eu esteja errado, mas eu não acho essa uma boa decisão.
Há uma pequena chance de eu estar errado, mas eu não acho essa uma boa decisão.

Kate might not be able to get to the meeting in time.


Pode ser que a Kate não chegue a tempo na reunião.
É possível que a Kate não chegue a tempo na reunião.
É pouco provável que a Kate chegue a tempo na reunião.

We can also use might to make suggestions.

MODAL VERB – MIGHT


Uses

You might like this book I am reading.


Pode ser que você goste desse livro que eu estou lendo.
É possível que você goste desse livro que eu estou lendo.

You might want to try the gazpacho. It’s delicious.


Pode ser que você queira experimentar o gaspacho. Está delicioso.
É possível que você queira experimentar o gaspacho. Está delicioso.

Now you know what a modal verb is, the structures you’ll use with them, and
when and how to use the modal verb might.

< voltar para o índice


213
Modal Verb Should
Modal verbs are also known as modal auxiliary verbs because they add meaning
to the main verb.
Modal verbs will follow the same sentence structure in the affirmative, negative,
and interrogative forms. Check the following table to see how it works:

MODAL VERBS
Sentence Structure

Affirmative Form

Subject + Modal Verb + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)

Negative Form

Subject + Modal Verb + Not + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Not + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)

Interrogative Form

Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Modal Verb + Sujeito + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)

< voltar para o índice


214
The modal verb should has different uses. One of the most frequent is to give advice or
recommendations. For example:

MODAL VERB SHOULD


Advice and Recommendation

You should check the airline policies before you pack.


Você deve verificar as políticas da companhia aérea antes de fazer as malas.

You shouldn’t drink so much coffee.


Você não deve beber tanto café.

Depending on the context, sentences with the modal verb should can be understood
as a polite way to talk about obligations and duties. Have a look at some examples:

MODAL VERB SHOULD


Expressing Obligations and Duties

You should clean your room. People should respect other people’s choices.
Você deve limpar o seu quarto. As pessoas devem respeitar as escolhas de outras pessoas.
(It’s your responsibility). (It’s a social rule).

In some other cases, should expresses that something is probable because it is logical or normal,
that is, you refer to a deduction. For instance:

MODAL VERB SHOULD


Deductions

She left home half an hour ago. She should be arriving.


Ela saiu de casa meia hora atrás. Ela deve estar chegando.
(It’s a deduction based on the time she left her house and how far her home is from here)

The singer should launch her new album next month.


A cantora deve lançar o seu novo álbum mês que vem.
(Deduction based on behavior or clues).

< voltar para o índice


215
When talking about modals, the meaning we want to convey
depends on the context. The same sentence may have different
meanings. Compare:

MODAL VERB SHOULD


Different Meanings Depending on the Context

You should get here before noon.


Você deve chegar aqui antes de meio-dia.

• It could be a piece of advice


• Poderia ser um conselho

• It could be your duty


• Poderia ser sua obrigação

• It could be the speaker’s expectation


• Poderia ser uma expectativa do falante

And this is how you use the modal verb should.

< voltar para o índice


216
Modal Verb Would
Modal Verbs are also known as modal auxiliary verbs because they add meaning to the main
verb. They express possibility, probability, ability, permission, assumption, obligation, or
prohibition.
The structure of the modal verbs follows the same pattern. Check the following table.

MODAL VERBS
Sentence Structure

Affirmative Form

Subject + Modal Verb + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)

Negative Form

Subject + Modal Verb + Not + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Not + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)

Interrogative Form

Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Modal Verb + Sujeito + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)

In some cases, the modal verb would is used as a softer and less definitive form of the modal will,
or as the past of will when we are reporting sentences.
Expressing hypothesis is one of the most common uses of the modal verb would. And since it is
used to express hypothetical situations, you’ll see that it is used in many conditional sentences.
In such cases, we’ll use a clause with would to refer to unreal or uncertain situations together with
an if-clause.

< voltar para o índice


217
MODAL VERB WOULD
Hypothesis

If I had a lot of money, I would travel the world.


Se eu tivesse muito dinheiro, viajaria pelo mundo.
(I don’t have a lot of money. So, traveling the world is just a hypothetical situation.)

Would you invite your boss for your birthday?


Você convidaria o seu chefe para o seu aniversário?
(The question is asked out of curiosity. It’s a hypothetical situation.)

If I were you, I wouldn’t go the Caribbean now. It’s hurricane season.


Se eu fosse você, eu não iria para o Caribe agora. É temporada de furacão.
(It’s a hypothetical situation because I am not you, and I am not going to the Caribbean.)

We can also use would to make polite requests. If we observe it carefully, we’ll see that it’s still
a request made from a hypothetical perspective, but now you are actually asking something
from someone.

MODAL VERB WOULD


Polite Requests and Offers

Polite Requests Polite Offers

Would you help me with my project? Would you like some coffee?
Você me ajudaria com o meu projeto? Você aceitaria um café?

Would you go to the grocery store for me? Would you like me to drive you home?
Você iria ao supermercado para mim? Você gostaria que eu te levasse para casa?

< voltar para o índice


218
Would is also used to talk about a past habit or to express refusal in the past.

MODAL VERB WOULD


Talk about a past habit or express refusal in the past

I asked her what was going on, but she wouldn’t tell me.
Perguntei o que estava acontecendo, mas ela não quis me dizer.
(I asked her in the past and she refused to tell me.)

When I was younger, I would argue with my brother all the time.
Quando eu era mais novo, eu discutia com meu irmão o tempo todo.
(It was a typical behavior in the past.)

We can use would in expressions too. Would rather is used to say we prefer
one thing to another. Most of the times, we use the contracted form, which is
“I’d rather.”

MODAL VERB WOULD


Expressions – Would Rather

I’d rather stay home tonight. I’m tired.


Eu prefiro ficar em casa hoje à noite. Estou cansado(a).

Another commonly used expression with would is “would mind.” We use it to ask for favors or permission.
But the structure is a bit different. Check it out in the following box.

MODAL VERB WOULD


Expressions – Would Mind

Asking for a favor Asking for permission

Would you mind opening the window? Would you mind if I opened the window?
Você se importaria de abrir a janela? Você se importaria se eu abrisse a janela?
(Would you mind + verb in the -ING form) (Would you mind if + subject + verb in the past)

And this is how you use the modal verb would.

< voltar para o índice


219
Present Perfect
The present perfect is a verb form used to talk about things that happened or
started in the past but are connected to the present, either by relevance or
continuity. Its concept can be tricky, because not all languages have a specific
verb form to fit this definition.
Let’s start by analyzing the structure of the present perfect. We mainly use the
verb to have in the present as an auxiliary, that is, have (or has for the third
person singular), and the main verb in the past participle.
The verb to have functions as an auxiliary verb in the structure of the present
perfect. So, it’s important to recall its conjugation according to the subjects.
As for the main verb in the past participle, the general rule is that, for regular
verbs in the past participle, we add -D, -ED, or -IED to the verb. And irregular
verbs don’t follow a pattern. Go over the grammar guide dedicated to irregular
verbs in the past participle.

PRESENT PERFE CT
Subject + Have + Past Participle + (Complement)

Subject Auxilary Verb To Have


I/you/we/they have
he/she/it has

Main Verb: Past Participle


Regular Verbs: add -D, -ED, or -IED
Irregular Verbs: follow no pattern

< voltar para o índice


220
For affirmative sentences, the structure is the subject followed by the verb to have
in the present, then the main verb in the past participle, and the complement, if
necessary. The verb to have is conjugated according to the subject.

PRESENT PERFE CT
Affirmative Sentences

Structure: Subject + Have/Has + Main Verb (Past Participle) + Complement

I’ve taken many English courses.


Eu fiz muitos cursos de inglês.
(I’ve = I have; “taken” is the past participle of the irregular verb “to take”)

This place has been highly recommended.


Esse lugar foi muito recomendado.
(“This place” = it; “been” is the past participle of the irregular verb “to be”)

For interrogative sentences, we’ll invert the order and place the auxiliary verb
before the subject.
When you ask questions in the present perfect, it’s very common to use the
adverb ever to ask if something has happened at any time before now.

PRESENT PERFE CT
Interrogative Sentences

Structure: Have/Has + Subject + Main Verb (Past Participle) + Complement

Have you found the book you were looking for?


Você achou o livro que estava procurando?
(“found” is the past participle of the irregular verb “to find”)

Structure: Have/Has + Subject + Ever + Main Verb (Past Participle) + Complement

Have you ever watched a soccer game at a stadium?


Você já assistiu a um jogo de futebol em um estádio alguma vez?
(“watch” is the past participle of the regular verb “to watch”)

< voltar para o índice


221
For negative sentences, we place the negative particle not after the auxiliary verb.
In the negative form, we can use the adverb never to express at no time and convey
a negative meaning. However, we cannot use a double negative, so if we use
never, the sentence will be made in the affirmative structure, and the adverb will
show that it’s a negative statement.

PRESENT PERFE CT
Negative Sentences

Structure: Subject + Have/Has + Not + Main Verb (Past Participle) + Complement

I haven’t seen snow.


Eu não vi neve.
(haven’t = have not; “seen” is the past participle of the irregular verb “to see”)

Structure: Subject + Have/Has + Never + Main Verb (Past Participle) + Complement

I’ve never been to Paris.


Eu nunca estive em Paris.
(Affirmative Structure + Never = Negative Statement)

Now that we’ve seen the structures, let’s check the use. The main use of the present perfect
is to talk about things that happened or started in the past but are connected to the present
either by relevance or continuity.
Most of the time, it is the speaker’s choice to focus on the past action, using the simple past, or
on the relevance it has to the present moment, choosing the present perfect.
Analyze the comparison of these two tenses in context.

SIMPLE PAST AND PRESENT PERFE CT

Simple Past

The simple past focuses on the past event, and not on any eventual connection
between this past action and the present moment.
O simple past foca no evento passado, e não em alguma possível conexão que possa
haver entre esse evento passado e o momento presente.

Last year, I traveled to Europe and visited many museums. It was an amazing trip.
Ano passado, eu viajei para a Europa e visitei muitos museus. Foi uma viagem incrível.
(the focus is only on the past action)

< voltar para o índice


222
Present Perfect

The present perfect highlights that there is a connection between something that
happened in the past and the present moment.
O present perfect destaca que há uma conexão entre algo que aconteceu no passado e o
momento presente

Visiting so many museums has changed my view of the world. I’ve learned a lot.
Visitar tantos museus mudou a minha visão de mundo. Eu aprendi muito.
(The focus is on the relationship between a past action and present moment: I’m a
different person now because of a past action)

It’s important to notice that, when the speaker chooses to use the present perfect,
the relevance of that past action to the present might be implicit in the context.

SIMPLE PAST AND PRESENT PERFE CT

The game has begun.


O jogo começou.
(It is happening right now and that is the focus)

The game began at 4 p.m.


O jogo começou às 4h da tarde.
(The focus is on the information on when it started)

Another important thing: we never use the present perfect with time adverbs that
refer to specific moments in the past, such as yesterday, last year, or last month.
When we choose to use the present perfect, the focus is on the consequence,
relevance, or continuity that a past action has in the present, so saying when it
happened is unimportant and even wrong.
It doesn’t mean that you don’t know when it happened, but this is not what you want
to highlight. Adverbs that refer to specific moments in the past are mostly used with
the simple past or the past continuous.
There are other adverbs used with the present perfect that highlight its connection
to the present either by relevance or continuity. When we use the present perfect to
describe an action that is connected to the present by continuity, we frequently
use the adverbs never or always or some adverbial phrases.

< voltar para o índice


223
PRESENT PERFE CT

Chris has lived in London his whole life.


Chris morou em Londres a sua vida inteira.
(The action started when Chris was born and is still in progress)
(A ação começou quando Chris nasceu e continua acontecendo)

Karen has known him for years.


Karen o conhece há anos.
(Karen knew him in the past and knows him now)
(Karen o conheceu no passado e o conhece até agora)

She’s always been in love with him.


Ela sempre foi apaixonada por ele.
(She fell for him in the past and is still in love with him)
(Ela se apaixonou por ele no passado e continua apaixonada no presente)

But they have never been in a serious relationship.


Mas eles nunca tiveram um relacionamento sério.
(It did not happen in the past and still hasn’t happened in the present)
(Não aconteceu no passado e continua sem ter acontecido no presente)

Besides never and always, there are other adverbs of time commonly used with
the present perfect. Check some examples:

PRESENT PERFE CT AND ADVERBS OF TIME

EVER – any time before now ( mostly in interrogative sentences)


Alguma vez; já

JUST – a short time before now YET – until now


Acabei de...; há pouco tempo Ainda; até o momento

ALREADY – happened earlier than expected


Já; antes do esperado

< voltar para o índice


224
Check the following box to see some examples of adverbs used in
present perfect sentences. Notice that we place the adverbs before
the main verb, except for the adverb yet, which usually comes at the
end of the sentence.

PRESENT PERFE CT – ADVERBS

Have you ever seen snow?


Você já viu neve alguma vez?

Come in. We have just started the meeting.


Entre. Acabamos de começar a reunião.

I have already finished the report.


Eu já terminei o relatório.

I haven’t met the new director yet.


Eu não conheci o novo diretor ainda.

And now you know the structure and uses of the present perfect.

< voltar para o índice


225
Quantifiers
Quantifiers are words used to specify quantity, amounts, and degrees.
They are also determiners because they modify a noun.
In order to study the quantifiers, we’ll divide them into three groups. In the
first group, we’ll place the quantifiers that can be used with countable and
uncountable nouns. In the second, the ones that can only be used with countable
nouns, and, in the third, the ones that are only used with uncountable nouns.
Let’s begin with the first group, which is composed of quantifiers that can be
used with both countable and uncountable nouns.
One of the most frequent quantifiers is any because it can be used for a variety of
things. Check out some of its uses in the following box.

QUANTIFIERS
Countable and Uncountable Nouns

ANY

I don’t have any doubt.


Eu não tenho nenhuma dúvida.
(Any emphasizes the negative. There is no doubt, not even one.)

I could eat any of these. They all look delicious.


Eu poderia comer qualquer um desses. Todos parecem deliciosos.
(Any means “whichever;” it conveys the idea that it doesn’t matter which.)

Is there any student in the library?


Tem algum aluno na biblioteca?
(Any is used to ask if there is none, one, or more kids at the library.)

Still looking at quantifiers that can be used with countable and uncountable
things, some, enough, and all are also very common.

< voltar para o índice


226
Let’s see two examples with each of them: One with a countable noun and
another with an uncountable noun.
The quantifier some is used to express an unknown or unspecified amount.

QUANTIFIERS
Countable and Uncountable Nouns

SOME

There are some kids waiting for Halloween treats.


Há algumas crianças esperando doces de Dia das Bruxas.
(We don’t know the exact number of kids, but it’s possible to count them.)

I need to drink some water.


Eu preciso beber um pouco de água.
(It’s not possible to count water, unless it’s in a container.)

Would you like some coffee?


Você gostaria de um pouco de café?
(It’s commonly used to offer things.)

Enough is used to say that it is the exact quantity or amount that is required.
It’s similar to sufficient.

QUANTIFIERS
Countable and Uncountable Nouns

ENOUGH

We have enough Halloween treats for the kids.


Temos doces de Dia das Bruxas o suficiente para as crianças.
(The Halloween treats we have are sufficient.)

You haven’t drunk enough water.


Você não bebeu água o suficiente.
(As it’s a negative statement, the water you’ve drunk wasn’t enough.)

< voltar para o índice


227
All is used to express the total amount of something.

QUANTIFIERS
Countable and Uncountable Nouns

ALL

All the kids will have Halloween treats.


Todas as crianças receberão doces de Dia das Bruxas.
(100% of the kids will have the treats.)

It’d be nice if all the water on the planet were drinkable.


Seria bom se toda a água do planeta fosse potável.
(All means the whole or 100% of something.)

The quantifiers more, a lot of, most, lots of, and less can be used with both
countable and uncountable nouns.
More is used to state a greater or an additional amount. A lot of or lots of means a
large number or amount, and both expressions are interchangeable. Lots of is more
informal, though. Most is used to express the greatest amount or degree, whereas
less means the smallest amount possible.

QUANTIFIERS
Countable and Uncountable Nouns

LESS
MORE
I couldn’t care less.
I need to sleep more.
Eu não poderia me importar menos.
Eu preciso dormir mais.
(The smallest degree)

MOST
Most people are good.
A maioria das pessoas é boa.
(Most people = The majority of people)

A LOT OF / LOTS OF
I wish I had a lot of money. / I wish I had lots of money.
Eu gostaria de ter muito dinheiro.

< voltar para o índice


228
We are now going to the second group, which is composed of the quantifiers that
can only be used with nouns we can count.
Many is a common quantifier to specify a large amount.

QUANTIFIERS
Countable Nouns

MANY

There are many apples in the fruit basket.


Tem muitas maçãs na fruteira.
(We don’t know the exact number, but we know that there is a big quantity.)

How many apples do I need to make the pie?


De quantas maçãs eu preciso para fazer a torta?
(I want to know the exact quantity.)

The opposite of many is few, or a few. Both indicate a small quantity or number of
things. However, there’s a slight difference in meaning: we use few when the small
quantity carries a negative meaning, that is, the small quantity isn’t desired or isn’t
considered enough. On the other hand, a few carries a positive meaning, so, it’s
used when the small quantity is considered good or enough.

QUANTIFIERS
Countable Nouns

FEW / A FEW

Few students knew the answer.


Poucos alunos sabiam a resposta.
(In this case, a small quantity isn’t good or desired. It’d be better
if all or the majority knew the answer.)

We are a few miles from the airport.


Estamos a poucos quilômetros do aeroporto.
(In this case, being near the airport carries a positive idea.
It’s something good or desired.)

< voltar para o índice


229
There are other quantifiers used with countable nouns, such as several, both,
and each.
Several is used to express more than two countable things or people. Both is
used to identify two people or things together, and each refers to every single
individual or thing in a universe of two or more people or things.

QUANTIFIERS
Countable Nouns

SEVERAL
It took me several days to figure it out.
Levei vários dias para entender.
(More than two days; it could be replaced by many days.)

BOTH
I like both dresses.
Eu gosto de ambos vestidos.
(Both = two)

EACH
I know each student’s needs.
Eu sei as necessidades de cada aluno.
(Each = every single student)

It’s time to look at the third group: quantifiers that can only be used
with uncountable nouns.
We use much to refer to a large amount, usually in negative
sentences, or to ask questions about amounts.

QUANTIFIERS
Uncountable Nouns

MUCH

We don’t have much time.


Não temos muito tempo.

How much time do you have?


Quanto tempo você tem?

< voltar para o índice


230
The quantifiers a little and little are used with uncountable nouns to express a small
amount of something. The difference is that a little implies that this small amount is
good and enough, and little implies that it isn’t good.

QUANTIFIERS
Uncountable Nouns

A LITTLE / LITTLE

I have a little money.


Eu tenho um pouco de dinheiro.
(It’s a positive thing because I have it.)

I have little money.


Eu tenho pouco dinheiro.
(It’s negative because I don’t have enough. I wish I had more.)

Now you know what a quantifier is, and how and when to use the most common ones.

< voltar para o índice


231
Question Word -
What
Question words are used to ask direct and indirect questions. On this grammar
guide, we’ll focus on the question word what, which is used to ask general
questions.
In most cases, the structure of direct and indirect questions follows this pattern:

QUESTION WORD – WHAT


Direct and Indirect Questions

What is your favorite color?


Qual é a sua cor favorita?
(Direct Question: Question Word + Interrogative Form)

Tell me what your favorite color is.


Diga-me qual é a sua cor favorita.
(Indirect Question: Question Word + Affirmative Form)

But when we ask direct questions with the question word what, there are three
possible structures.

QUESTION WORD – WHAT


Structure – Direct Questions

1. What + Interrogative Form

2. What + Verb in the Third Person Singular + Complement

3. What + Noun + Interrogative Form

< voltar para o índice


232
Let’s analyze each structure, starting with the first one, which is the question
word what followed by an interrogative form. This structure can be used with
any verb form.
Let’s see some examples:

QUESTION WORD – WHAT


What + Interrogative Form

What does she want for breakfast?


O que ela quer de café da manhã?

(Simple Present: Question Word + Auxiliary Verb + Subject +


Main Verb in its Base Form+ Complement)

What did you do yesterday?


O que você fez ontem?

(Simple Past: Question Word + Auxiliary Verb + Subject +


Main Verb in its Base Form + Complement)

What were you doing last week?


O que você estava fazendo semana passada?

(Past Continuous: Question Word + Auxiliary Verb + Subject +


Main Verb in the –ING Form + Complement)

What have you been doing lately?


O que você tem feito ultimamente?

(Present Perfect: Question Word + 1st Auxiliary + Subject + 2nd Auxiliary +


Main verb in the –ING Form + Complement)

What would you do with a million dollars?


O que você faria com um milhão de dólares?

(Simple Present: Question Word + Modal Verb + Subject +


Main Verb in its Base Form + Complement)

< voltar para o índice


233
It is important to notice that the structure what + interrogative form will never be used for
questions about the subject of the sentence. When we follow this structure, it means that the
subject is included in the given question.
Let’s take a closer look:

QUESTION WORD – WHAT


What + Interrogative Form

What does she want for breakfast?


O que ela quer de café da manhã?

She wants eggs and toast.


Ela quer ovos e torradas.

(The question is not about who performs the action, but about what the person
wants. The subject “she” is part of the question. The core answer is “eggs and toast.”)
(Não tem relação com o sujeito, mas com o que o sujeito quer fazer.
O sujeito “ela” é parte da pergunta. A resposta central é “ovos e torradas”.)

What were you doing last week?


O que você estava fazendo semana passada?

I was traveling.
Eu estava viajando.

(It’s not about who was performing the action, but what the person was doing.
The subject “you,” which is part of the question, becomes “I” in the answer.
And the core answer is “traveling.”)
(Não tem relação com quem estava fazendo a ação, mas com o que a pessoa estava
fazendo. O sujeito “você”, que é parte da pergunta, vira “eu” na resposta.
A resposta central é “viajando”.)

< voltar para o índice


234
But it is possible to ask questions with the question word what to learn about the subject of a sentence.
In such cases, we will use the structure: What + Verb in The Third Person Singular + Complement.
Check the following examples:

QUESTION WORD – WHAT


What + Verb in Third Person Singular + (Complement)

What makes you happy? Spending time with my family makes me happy.
O que deixa você feliz? Passar tempo com a minha família me deixa feliz.

(The core answer is “spending time with my family,” which is the subject of the answer and is not
part of the question. That is why the verb in question is in the third person singular “makes.”)
(A resposta central é “passar tempo com a minha família”, que é o sujeito da resposta e não faz parte da
pergunta. Por isso o verbo da pergunta está na terceira pessoa do singular “makes”, deixa.)

There are so many people here. What’s happening?


Tem tanta gente aqui. O que está acontecendo?

A music festival (is happening here).


Um festival de música (está acontecendo aqui).

(The core answer is “a music festival,” which is the subject of the answer and is not part
of the question. That is why the verb in question is in the third person singular “is.”)
(A resposta central é “um festival de música”, que é o sujeito da resposta e não faz parte
da pergunta. Por isso o verbo da pergunta está na terceira pessoa do singular “is”, está.)

What’s bothering them?


O que está incomodando eles?

Not having money to pay their bills (is bothering them).


Não ter dinheiro para pagar as suas contas (está incomodando eles).

(The core answer is “not having money to pay their bills,” which is the subject of the answer and is
not part of the question. That is why the verb in question is in the third person singular “is.”)
(A resposta central é “não ter dinheiro para pagar suas contas”, que é o sujeito da resposta e não faz
parte da pergunta. Por isso o verbo da pergunta está na terceira pessoa do singular “is”, está.)

< voltar para o índice


235
Let’s take a closer look and analyze the structure of the examples
we have previously seen.

QUESTION WORD – WHAT

(1) (2) (3)


What + Verb in the Third Person Singular + Complement (if necessary)

(1) (2) (3)


What makes you happy?

(1) (2)
What’s happening?

(1) (2) (3)


What’s bothering them?

If you want to ask a more specific question using what, place a noun right after
the question word.

QUESTION WORD – WHAT


What + Noun + Interrogative Form

What time do you usually wake up?


A que horas você geralmente acorda?
(What + time = used to ask about the hour)

What kind of music do you like?


De que tipo de música você gosta?
(What + kind = used to ask about the specific type of a thing)

What size do you need?


De que tamanho você precisa?
(What + size = used to ask about size)

< voltar para o índice


236
There are still some special cases, such as what + about. It is used
to make an offer or to ask about your opinion or how you feel about
something.

QUESTION WORD – WHAT


Special Cases – What About

What about going to the movies?


Que tal irmos ao cinema?

Great idea.
Ótima ideia.

How are you?


Como vai você?

I’m fine, thanks. What about you?


Eu estou bem. E você?

In informal conversations, there are some common


expressions with the question word what.

QUESTION WORD – WHAT


Expressions

What’s up?
E aí?

What now?
O que agora?

< voltar para o índice


237
The question word what can also be used in exclamations to express surprise,
shock, or emotions. In this case, we use: what + an article + (an adjective) + a
noun. We may or may not include the adjective, but the noun must always be
there in exclamations with what.

QUESTION WORD – WHAT


Exclamations

Structure: What + Article + (Adjective) + Noun

What a (beautiful) place!


Que lugar (bonito)!
(What + Article “a” + (Adjective “beautiful”) + Noun “place”)

What a great song!


Que música ótima!
(What + Article “a” + Adjective “great” + Noun “song”)

What a ( nice) gesture!


Que gesto (legal)!
(What + Article “a” + (Adjective “nice”) + Noun “gesture)

What a song!
Que música!
(What + Article “a” + Noun “song”)

Now you know different ways in which you can use the question word what, the structure used
with different verb forms, as well as how to use it in exclamations and expressions.

< voltar para o índice


238
Question Word –
Why
Question words are used to ask direct and indirect questions. Common
question words include what, when, where, which, why, who, and how.
The question word why is used to ask or to talk about the reason for something.

QUESTION WORD – WHY

Why
Por que / Por quê

Just like the other question words, why can be used in direct and indirect
questions.

QUESTION WORD – WHY


Direct and Indirect Questions

Why are you so sad?


Por que você está tão triste?
(Why + interrogative form = direct question)

Please, tell me why you are so sad.


Por favor, me diga por que você está tão triste.
(A question inside a sentence = indirect question)

Most direct questions will follow this pattern: question word why +
interrogative form, no matter which verb form you choose to use.

< voltar para o índice


239
QUESTION WORD – WHY
Why + Interrogative Form

Why did you say that?


Por que você disse isso?
(Why + Interrogative Form – Simple Past)

Why are you doing this?


Por que você está fazendo isso?
(Why + Interrogative Form – Present Continuous)

Why have you been going there?


Por que você tem ido lá?
(Why + Interrogative Form – Present Perfect Continuous)

Why would I do that?


Por que eu faria isso?
(Why + Interrogative Form – Modal Verb)

Questions with why can also be followed by a verb in the infinitive without to. This structure
is typically used to suggest that an action is pointless or unnecessary.

QUESTION WORD – WHY


Why + Infinitive Form (without To)

I’ve already told you this movie is terrible. Why waste your time with it?
Eu já te disse que esse filme é horrível. Por que perder seu tempo com isso?
(Why + verb “to waste” in the infinitive without to)

Why argue with Gabriel? He’ll never change his mind.


Por que discutir com o Gabriel? Ele nunca vai mudar de ideia.
(Why + verb “to argue” in the infinitive without to).

< voltar para o índice


240
When we reply to a negative statement and we want to ask the reason, why not sounds more natural than
why. Why not can also be used as a reply when we want to accept a suggestion.

QUESTION WORD – WHY


Why + Not—Replies

Replying to a Negative Statement


Respondendo a uma declaração negativa

I don’t want to go out tonight. Why not?


Eu não quero sair hoje à noite. Por que não?

Replying to a Suggestion or Invitation


Respondendo a uma sugestão ou convite

Let’s order some food and watch a movie at Vamos pedir comida e assistir a um filme em casa.
home. Sure, why not?

It is also possible to use why not when we want to give a suggestion. In this case,
we can use why not + infinitive without to or we can use why + interrogative-
negative form of the simple present.
Check the examples:

QUESTION WORD – WHY


Why + Negative Form—Suggestions

Why not stay home and watch a movie?


Por que não ficar em casa e assistir a um filme?
(In this sentence, “why not” is followed by the verb “to stay”
in the infinitive without to and the complement.)

Why don’t we stay home and watch a movie?


Por que a gente não fica em casa e assiste a um filme?
(In this sentence, “why” is followed by the interrogative-negative
form of the simple present.)

< voltar para o índice


241
It is important to notice that we use why to ask about the reason, and we use
because or because of when we are giving the reason for something in affirmative
sentences.
The difference is that because will be used before a complete sentence, whereas
because of will be followed by a noun or noun phrase.

BE CAUSE VS. BE CAUSE OF

Why are you leaving earlier?


Por que você está saindo mais cedo?

Because I have a doctor’s appointment.


Porque eu tenho uma consulta médica.
(Complete sentence = Because + Subject + Verb + Complement)

Because of my doctor’s appointment.


Por causa da minha consulta médica.
(Because of + Noun Phrase)

Now you know what a question word is, how to use why as a question word
using different verb forms, and how to use because to state reasons.

< voltar para o índice


242
Simple Past –
Other Verbs
The simple past is a verb form used to talk about things that happened or existed in
the past.
Check the structures, starting with affirmative sentences in the past.

SIMPLE PAST
Affirmative Sentences

Structure: Subject + Main Verb (in the Past) + Complement

I watched all the episodes of this series.


Eu assisti a todos os episódios desta série.
(I performed this action in the past. It’s over now because I finished it).

In affirmative sentences, the auxiliary verb is not necessary, but it can be used in some
specific contexts to emphasize the message.
If we decide to use the auxiliary did to add emphasis to affirmative sentences, the main verb
goes back to its base form.

SIMPLE PAST
Affirmative Sentences – Adding Emphasis

Structure: Subject + Auxiliary Verb (in the Past) +


Main Verb (Base Form) + Complement

I did watch all the episodes of this series.


Eu (de fato) assisti a todos os episódios desta série.
(Note that the auxiliary doesn’t have a meaning, only the function of emphasizing).

< voltar para o índice


243
The verb conjugation in the simple past will be the same for all persons, singular or plural.
What we must take into consideration, though, is that some verbs in English are regular, while
others are irregular.
In the previous example in the affirmative form, we used the regular verb to watch in the past,
which is watched.
For regular verbs, we’ll add -D, -ED, or -IED to the end, depending on how the base form is
spelled. Check the spelling rules for regular verbs in the past.

SIMPLE PAST – RE GUL AR VERBS


Spelling Rules

GENERAL RULE: ADD -ED

To watch – watched To play – played


Assistir Brincar, jogar, tocar

VERBS ENDING IN -E: ADD -D

To like – liked To love – loved


Gostar Amar

VERBS ENDING IN CONSONANT + -Y: DROP THE -Y AND ADD -IED

To study – studied To cry – cried


Estudar Chorar

CVC VERBS: DOUBLE THE LAST CONSONANT AND ADD -ED

To stop – stopped To plan – planned


Parar Planejar

< voltar para o índice


244
These are the spelling rules for all regular verbs in the past, which are most
verbs in English.
But there are few irregular verbs in English, and they do deserve some special
attention. As the name says, they are irregular, which means there is not one
pattern that applies to all of them.
For instance, some irregular verbs suffer significant changes in their base
forms. That’s the case of the verb to be, which in the past becomes was or were
depending on the subject, or the verb to have, which becomes had, and the verb
to go, which becomes went. On the other hand, verbs such as to quit, to put, or
to cut will keep their base form when conjugated in the past.

SIMPLE PAST
Irregular Verbs

To be – was/were To quit – quit


Ser, estar Desistir

To have – had To cut – cut


Ter Cortar

To go – went To put – put


Ir Botar, colocar

There’s a grammar guide dedicated to irregular verbs in the past. Check it so you can learn
more about them.
Now, when using sentences in the negative and in the interrogative forms, the fact that the
verbs can be either regular or irregular is unimportant, since it’s the auxiliary verb did that
will be conjugated. This means that the main verb goes back to its base form.

SIMPLE PAST
Negative Sentences

Structure: Subject + Auxiliary (Did) + NOT + Main Verb (Base Form) + Complement

I didn’t watch this series.


Eu não assisti a esta série.
(didn’t = did not)

< voltar para o índice


245
The contracted form didn’t will be used in most cases. However, in formal
written language, it is advisable to avoid the use of the contraction. In spoken
language, if you use the full form, you are adding emphasis to a negative
statement.

SIMPLE PAST
Negative Sentences – Adding Emphasis

I did not watch this series.


Eu não assisti a esta série.

For interrogative sentences, we’ll invert the order and place the auxiliary before the subject.

SIM PLE PAST


Interrogative Sentences

Structure: Subject + Auxiliary (Did) + NOT + Main Verb (Base Form) + Complement

Did you watch all the episodes of the final season?


Você assistiu a todos os episódios da temporada final?

Now that we’ve seen the simple past in the affirmative form and the spelling
rules for regular verbs, as well as the structures of negative and interrogative
sentences, it’s time to see its common usages.
We use the simple past to talk about definite time in the past.

SIMPLE PAST
Uses

I graduated in December.
Eu me formei em dezembro.
(“To graduate” is a regular verb, and its past form is “graduated”)

We went to the movies yesterday.


Nós fomos ao cinema ontem.
(“To go” is an irregular verb, and its past form is “went”)

< voltar para o índice


246
The simple past may or may not have an explicit time reference.
Either way, it refers to past events.

SIMPLE PAST
Uses

Anne studied with me.


A Anne estudou comigo.
(No time reference: but it’s still a finished action in past)

Santos Dumont flew around the Eiffel Tower.


Santos Dumont voou em volta da Torre Eiffel.
(No time reference: but it’s still a finished action in past)

We can use the simple past to talk about events that happened once or events that happened
with some frequency in the past.

SIMPLE PAST
Uses

I went to Italy for my 15th birthday.


Eu fui para a Itália no meu aniversário de 15 anos.
(The trip to Italy is an isolated event that happened because of my 15th birthday).

Every summer I traveled with my family to Italy.


Todo verão eu viajava com minha família para a Itália.
(The trip to Italy was something that happened more frequently, every summer.)

< voltar para o índice


247
When we want to make it clearer that we are talking about a past habit, something that
happened frequently in the past, it’s also possible to use the expression used to followed
by a main verb.

USED TO
Frequent Events in the Past

Structure: Subject + Used to + Main Verb (Base Form) + Complement

I used to travel to Italy every summer.


Eu costumava viajar para a Itália todo verão.
(Used to + Main Verb in the Base Form = frequent events or habits in the past)

Now you know when and why we use the simple past with other verbs,
as well as its structures and spelling rules.

< voltar para o índice


248
Simple Past - To Be
The simple past is used to talk about an event that happened in the past. The time it occurred may
be given or not, but it refers to an event that happened in the past.
In this grammar guide, we’ll focus on the verb to be in the past. First, it’s important to know
that the verb to be is an irregular verb, and it’s the only verb in English that has two irregular
conjugations for the simple past depending on the person: was and were.

SIMPLE PAST
Verb To Be

Singular Plural
Verb (To Be) Verb (To Be)


First person I was we were


Second person you were you were

he/she/it was they were


Third person
seu(s), sua(s), dela seus, suas, deles, delas

Check the structures for interrogative, negative, and affirmative sentences.


The basic structure for affirmative sentences is the SVC structure, that is, the subject, the verb to be in the
past, and the complement.

SIM PLE PAST – TO BE


Affirmative Sentences

Structure: Subject + Verb + Complement

I was in Los Angeles last week.


Eu estava em Los Angeles na semana passada.
(Subject “I” + Verb in the Simple Past “was” + Complement “in Los Angeles last week”)

We were at the annual conference.


Nós estávamos na conferência anual.
(Subject “we” + Verb in the Simple Past “were” + Complement “at the annual conference”)

< voltar para o índice


249
To make a negative statement, you’ll place the negative particle not after the verb. It is very
common to see the contracted forms, which are, wasn’t for was not, and weren’t for were not.

SIMPLE PAST – TO BE
Negative Sentences

Structure: Subject + Verb + NOT + Complement

I wasn’t home when he arrived.


Eu não estava em casa quando ele chegou.
(wasn’t = was not)

We weren’t in Rio last summer.


Nós não estávamos no Rio no verão passado.
(weren’t = were not)

In interrogative sentences, we invert the order and place the verb before the subject.

SIMPLE PAST – TO BE
Interrogative Sentences

Structure: Verb + Subject + Complement

Were you home last night?


Você estava em casa ontem à noite?

Was Meg with you?


A Meg estava com você?

In the simple past, you’ll only see contracted or short forms in negative sentences.
Short forms are very common in everyday situations. However, if you want to sound
more formal or more emphatic, use the full form.

< voltar para o índice


250
Let’s now check some possible uses of the verb to be in the simple past.
To Be is used to refer to past physical conditions or states.

SIMPLE PAST – TO BE
Uses

I was sad because I failed the exam.


Eu estava triste porque não passei na prova.
(I was feeling that way, but I am not anymore).

I was so thirsty.
Eu estava com muita sede.
(I am referring to a past state. I probably had water, and I am not thirsty anymore).

I was skinnier.
Eu era mais magro(a).
(It was how I looked in the past, but I’ve changed).

We can talk about a past age, profession, or marital status.

SIMPLE PAST – TO BE
Uses

Age
I was 40 years old when my son was born.
Eu tinha 40 anos quando o meu filho nasceu.
(I am not 40 anymore. I was 40 at the time of that specific event—the day my son was born).

Profession
I was a teacher.
Eu era professor(a).
(I was a teacher. I may have retired or I changed my profession).

Marital Status
I was married.
Eu era casado(a).
(Since it is in past, it means I am not married anymore.
I may be divorced or have become a widow/widower).

< voltar para o índice


251
We can use the verb to be in the past to talk about past relationships.

SIMPLE PAST – TO BE
Uses

We were friends.
Nós éramos amigos.
(We are not that close anymore, maybe we don’t see each
other as often as we used to).

He was my boyfriend.
Ele era meu namorado.
(We broke up and he is not my boyfriend anymore. He is my ex now).

We can also use the verb to be in the past to talk about past time and dates.

SIMPLE PAST – TO BE
Uses

It was about 8 a.m. when she left.


Eram cerca de 8 horas da manhã quando ela saiu.

Our last appointment was on January 3rd.


A nossa última consulta foi no dia 3 de janeiro.

< voltar para o índice


252
We can use the verb to be in the past to refer to places and locations in the past.

SIMPLE PAST – TO BE
Uses

Meg was at the mall with me.


A Meg estava no shopping comigo.
(I am mentioning the place where Meg and I were).

My office was on Fifth avenue.


Meu escritório ficava na 5ª avenida.
(I am talking about a past location—it’s not there anymore.
I may have moved to another office).

And now you know when and why we use the verb to be in the simple past, as well as its
structure and the contracted form for negative sentences.

< voltar para o índice


253
Simple Present -
Other Verbs
The simple present was divided into two grammar guides, and we did that
because there is an important difference in structure.
In this grammar guide, we’ll talk about the simple present with verbs that are not
the verb to be, that is, all the other verbs.
When we use the verb to be, we do not use an auxiliary verb to make interrogative
and negative sentences. But when we use other verbs, we need to use the
auxiliary verb. The auxiliary verb for the simple present is do or does, according to
the subject.
Check out the difference in the box.

SIMPLE PRESENT

Verb To Be Other Verbs

Interrogative Is she a teacher? Does she work as a teacher?


Ela é professora? Ela trabalha como professora?

Negative She isn’t a teacher. She doesn’t work as a teacher.


Ela não é professora. Ela não trabalha como professora.

The basic structure for the affirmative form is the SVC structure, that is, subject,
main verb, and complement. And the verb conjugation works like this: we’ll use the
base form of the verb for all persons, except for the third person singular. In this
case, we’ll add –S, –ES, or –IES to the end of the verb, depending on how it’s spelled.

< voltar para o índice


254
If you want to learn more about the third person spelling rules, you can check the grammar
guide on this topic. However, most verbs will only take a final S in the third person singular,
as you can see in the following table.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Affirmative Form

Singular Plural

I work here. We work here.


First person
Eu trabalho aqui. Nós trabalhamos aqui.

You work here. You work here.


Second person
Você trabalha aqui. Vocês trabalham aqui.

He works here.
Ele trabalha aqui.

She works here. They work here.


Third person
Ela trabalha aqui. Eles/Elas trabalham aqui.

It works for now.


Isso funciona por enquanto.

Notice that we do not use the auxiliary verb in the affirmative form. But it’s possible to use it to
add emphasis to a statement. In that case, the auxiliary verb is placed before the main verb.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Affirmative Form: Adding Emphasis

Usage of the Auxiliary Do

I do have the right to speak my mind.


Eu tenho (sim) o direito de dar minha opinião.

(The verb “do” is used as an auxiliary. So it does not have a meaning, but a function).
(O verbo “do” é usado como auxiliar. Portanto, não tem um significado, mas uma função).

< voltar para o índice


255
Thus, it is possible to use the auxiliary with the simple present in the affirmative form, but it’s also important
to notice that it adds emphasis to the sentence, which means that it is only going to happen in very specific
contexts.
As for the negative and interrogative forms, the auxiliary do is not optional, it’s necessary.
The basic structure for the negative form is the subject, the auxiliary verb do conjugated according to the
subject, the negative particle not, the main verb in its base form, and the complement, if necessary.
You should pay close attention to the third person singular. In both negative and interrogative forms, the
conjugation goes in the auxiliary verb, that is, we will use does, and, because of that, the main verb goes
back to its base form.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Negative Form

Singular Plural

I don’t work here. We don’t work here.


First person
Eu não trabalho aqui. Nós não trabalhamos aqui.

You don’t work here. You don’t work here.


Second person
Você não trabalha aqui. Vocês não trabalham aqui.

He doesn’t work here.


Ele não trabalha aqui.

She doesn’t work here. They don’t work here.


Third person
Ela não trabalha aqui. Eles/Elas não trabalham aqui.

It doesn’t work for now.


(Isso) não funciona por enquanto.

In informal language, the contracted


forms don’t (do + not) or doesn’t SIMPLE PRESENT
(does + not) are used in most cases. Negative Form: Adding Emphasis
In formal written language, we avoid
using contractions. Do Not Use the Contracted Form
On the other hand, in spoken
language, if we use the full form, You do not have the right to shout at people.
it probably means we want to add Você não tem o direito de gritar com as pessoas.
emphasis to a negative statement.

< voltar para o índice


256
The basic interrogative form structure in the simple present is the auxiliary verb do conjugated according to
the subject, the subject, the main verb in its base form, and the complement, if necessary.
So the position of the auxiliary verb and the subject is inverted, and, once again, in the third person singular,
the main verb goes back to its base form, and the auxiliary verb is conjugated.
Check out the following table:

SIMPLE PRESENT
Interrogative Form

Singular Plural

Do I work here? Do we work here?


First person
Eu trabalho aqui? Nós trabalhamos aqui?

Do you work here? Do you work here?


Second person
Você trabalha aqui? Vocês trabalham aqui?

Does he work here?


Ele trabalha aqui?

Does she work here? Do they work here?


Third person
Ela trabalha aqui? Eles/Elas trabalham aqui?

Does it work for now?


Isso funciona por enquanto?

The simple present is used to talk SIMPLE PRESENT


about facts and to show repetitions, Other Verbs – Uses
habits, or generalizations.

I work at a law firm.


Eu trabalho em um escritório de advocacia.

She works a lot.


Ela trabalha muito.

< voltar para o índice


257
It can also be used to present a series of events when we narrate
something or give instructions and directions.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Other Verbs – Uses

First you read the questions, then you have to mark the correct statement.
Primeiro você lê as perguntas, depois você tem que marcar a afirmação correta.

You go straight and turn right on the traffic light.


Você segue em frente e vira à direita no semáforo.

The simple present can convey the idea of immediacy and drama, and that’s why it’s commonly
used in stories or novels, in sports broadcasting, and in newspaper headlines, even when
reporting past events.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Other Verbs – Uses

She crosses the street toward him, looks back, and decides to let it go.
Ela atravessa a rua em direção a ele, olha para trás e decide deixar para lá.

He gets the ball, passes through the defense and shoots, but the goalkeeper saves it.
Ele pega a bola, passa pela defesa e chuta, mas o goleiro agarra.

Firefighters save many lives in Brooklyn.


Os bombeiros salvam muitas vidas no Brooklyn.

< voltar para o índice


258
In English, some verbs cannot be used in continuous forms. These verbs are
called non-progressive verbs, and we use them in the simple present. This
group is divided into different subgroups of verbs.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Non-progressive Verbs

Mental process verbs

know, suppose, think, understand


saber, supor, achar, entender

Verbs that express feelings

admire, adore, hate, like, respect


admirar, adorar, detestar, gostar, respeitar

Verbs that describe senses

smell, taste, hear


sentir cheiro, sentir sabor, ouvir

Speech act verbs

promise, swear, agree, deny


prometer, jurar, concordar, negar

And now you know the structure and the most common uses of the simple present.

< voltar para o índice


259
Simple Present -
Verb To Be
The simple present is used to talk about factual information or things
that happen regularly.

SIMPLE PRESENT

This wall is white.


Esta parede é branca.
(It’s a factual piece of information.)

I sleep for 8 or 9 hours a day.


Eu durmo de 8 a 9 horas por dia.
(It’s part of a routine, something I do every day.)

The simple present will be tackled in two different grammar guides.


In this one, we’ll focus on the simple present sentences in which the
main verb is the verb to be.
Check the following table to see the conjugation of the verb to be in
the simple present.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be

Singular Plural
First person I am We are
Second person You are You are
Third person He/She/It is They are

< voltar para o índice


260
There is a different sentence structure for the interrogative, negative, and
affirmative forms. In affirmative sentences, we’ll frequently use the SVC
structure, that is, Subject, Verb, and Complement. To make a negative
statement, you’ll place the negative particle not after the verb. And to ask a
question, we invert the order and place the verb before the subject.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be

Affirmative
Subject + Verb To Be + Complement

I’m a writer.
Eu sou escritor.

Negative
Subject + Verb To Be + NOT + Complement

I am not a writer.
Eu não sou escritor.

Interrogative
Verb To Be + Subject + Complement

Are you a writer?


Você é escritor?

The simple present of the verb to be is commonly


SIMPLE PRESENT
used in its contracted form, also known as short
Verb To Be – Contracted Form
form. Contractions are considered informal, and they
are very common in everyday situations. However,
if you want to sound more formal or more emphatic, Affirmative Negative
use the full form. I’m I’m not
The short or contracted forms can be used in You’re You aren’t
affirmative or negative sentences. He’s/She’s/It’s He/She/It isn’t
We’re We aren’t
They’re They aren’t

< voltar para o índice


261
Now that you know the conjugation in the plural and singular forms, its structure
for affirmative, negative, and interrogative sentences, as well as its full and
contracted forms, check out the possible uses of the verb to be in the simple
present.
It can be used to refer to personal information such as name, age, profession,
marital status, and nationality.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be – Uses

Name
I am Sophie. My name is Sophie.
Eu sou Sophie. O meu nome é Sophie.

Profession Age
I am an architect. I am 36 years old.
Eu sou arquiteta. Eu tenho 36 anos.

Nationality Marital Status


I am French. I am single.
Eu sou francesa. Eu sou solteira.

We can also use the verb to be followed by an adjective to talk about


permanent or temporary physical characteristics and feelings.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be – Uses

I am thirsty.
Eu estou com sede.
(It’s a state. Something I am experiencing now.)

I am skinny.
Eu sou magro(a).
(It refers to a physical characteristic.)

< voltar para o índice


262
The verb to be in the simple present is also used to talk about permanent or
temporary qualities or states, personal characteristics, or mood.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be – Uses

I am stressed. I am a stressed person.


Eu estou estressado(a). Eu sou uma pessoa estressada.
(It’s a current mood or a temporary state.) (It’s part of my personality.)

The verb to be in the simple present is also used to talk about time and dates.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be – Uses

It’s eleven o’clock. Our meeting is on December 3rd.


São onze horas. A nossa reunião é no dia 3 de dezembro.

We can use the verb to be in the simple present to refer to places and locations as well.

SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be – Uses

I am at the mall. The 9/11 Memorial is in Manhattan.


Eu estou no shopping. O memorial do 11 de Setembro é em Manhattan.

And now you know when and why we use the verb to be in the simple present.

< voltar para o índice


263
Spelling Rules -
Third Person
When we use the verbs in the third person singular in the simple present, there
are some specific spelling rules, which refer to how these verbs are written.
The third person is always about someone or something else. In the singular,
it will be used with nouns or pronouns that refer to a masculine noun or the
pronoun he, to a feminine noun or the pronoun she, and to a thing, idea, or
object or the pronoun it.
Remember that in the negative and interrogative forms of the simple present
the main verb remains in its base form for all persons. Thus, the third person
conjugation in the simple present will only be used in the main verb when it is
in the affirmative form.
The general rule is that you add -S to the verb.

SPELLING RULES – THIRD PERSON


General Rule – Add -S

work works
trabalhar trabalha

like likes
gostar gosta

For the verbs ending in O, S, X, CH, SH, or Z, we ADD -ES.

SPELLING RULES – THIRD PERSON


Verbs Ending in O, S, X, CH, SH, Z – Add -ES

go goes
ir vai

kiss kisses
beijar beija

< voltar para o índice


264
fix fixes
consertar conserta

watch watches
assistir assiste

crash crashes
bater bate

buzz buzzes
vibrar vibra

When the verb ends in Y and it is preceded by a consonant, drop the Y and add -IES.

SPELLING RULES – THIRD PERSON


Verbs Ending in Consonant + Y - Drop the Y, Add -IES

Ending in E: Add -ST


Terminação em E: Adicionar -ST

carry carries
carregar carrega

study studies
estudar estuda

try tries
tentar tenta

The verb to have is an exception: in the third person singular, we’ll drop VE and add -S.

SPELLING RULES – THIRD PERSON


Exception: To Have – Drop VE, add -S

have has
ter tem

And now you know the spelling rules for the verbs inflected in the third person singular
in affirmative sentences in the simple present.

< voltar para o índice


265
Subject Pronouns
Subject pronouns are personal pronouns that replace nouns that work as the
subject of the sentence. Let’s take a look at them:
First person pronouns are the ones used to refer to the person speaking;
second person pronouns refer to the person we are talking to; and third person
pronouns, to the people or objects we are talking about.

SUBJE CT PRONOUNS

Singular Plural

I we
First person
eu nós

you you
Second person
tu/você vós/vocês

he
ele ( pessoa)

she they
Third person
ela ( pessoa) eles/elas

it
ele/ela (exceto pessoas)

Let’s start analyzing the first person pronouns, the ones that refer to the person
who is talking.
The first person singular pronoun (I) is always written with a capital letter,
regardless of its position in the sentence. Capitalization does not happen with
any other pronoun in English, not even with the first person plural (we).

< voltar para o índice


266
SUBJE CT PRONOUNS
First Person

I am her friend.
Eu sou amigo(a) dela.
(first person singular pronoun I) We are friends.
Nós somos amigos.
(first person plural pronoun we)

Karen and I work at the same company.


Karen e eu trabalhamos na mesma empresa.
(first person singular pronoun I)

That was the moment we decided to quit the job.


Foi nesse momento que nós decidimos deixar o emprego.
(first person plural pronoun we)

For the second person, the subject pronoun you will be used both in the singular
and in the plural. You always refers to the person or the people you are talking to.
Therefore, the context will tell you whether it is singular or plural.

SUBJE CT PRONOUNS
Second Person

You are a teacher.


Você é professor.
(second person singular pronoun you)

You are teachers.


Vocês são professores.
(second person plural pronoun you)

< voltar para o índice


267
The third person is used to refer to the people or objects we are talking about. In the
third person singular, there are two pronouns used to refer to people, and, in some
cases, to pets: he and she. “He” is used for the masculine; and “she,” for the feminine.

SUBJE CT PRONOUNS
Third Person Singular (He/She)

John is a teacher. He is very good.


O John é professor. Ele é muito bom.
(third person singular masculine pronoun he)

Sarah is an actress. She is great.


A Sarah é atriz. Ela é ótima.
(third person singular feminine pronoun she)

For all the other cases, we will use the other third person singular pronoun, it;
that is, to talk about any other thing in the singular.

SUBJE CT PRONOUN
Third Person Singular (It)

Turn off the computer. It’s too hot.


Desligue o computador. Ele está muito quente.
(third person singular neutral pronoun it)

Turn the TV down. It’s loud.


Abaixe a televisão. Ela está alta.
(third person singular neutral pronoun it)

Notice that, in the examples we have just seen, the reference of the pronoun it is
clear in the sentence. It refers to the computer in the first example, and to the TV in
the second one.
But the pronoun it will also be used as a subject in sentences that have an
impersonal subject. This impersonal use of it introduces new information, and it is
used particularly to talk about time, dates, the weather, and opinion.
When it has an impersonal function, it does not refer to a previously mentioned
noun. In this case, the pronoun it simply works as the subject of the sentence.

< voltar para o índice


268
Take a look at the following examples:

SUBJE CT PRONOUN
Third Person Singular (It)

It’s a pleasure to be here.


É um prazer estar aqui.
(third person singular neutral pronoun it impersonal subject)

It’s hot today.


Está quente hoje.
(third person singular neutral pronoun it impersonal subject)

It’s late.
Está tarde.
(third person singular neutral pronoun it impersonal subject)

For the third person plural, there is only one pronoun: they. This is the plural form of the pronouns he, she,
and it—meaning this pronoun can be used to refer both to people and objects.

SUBJE CT PRONOUN
Third Person Plural (They)

They are good teachers. They are great students.


Elas são boas professoras. Eles são ótimos alunos.
(third person plural pronoun they) (third person plural pronoun they)

They are good books.


São bons livros.
(third person plural pronoun they)

And now you know how to use subject pronouns in English.

< voltar para o índice


269
Superlatives
Superlatives are used to compare a person, thing, or idea to the group to
which they belong. We use different structures for short and long adjectives
or adverbs.
The structure used with short adjectives or adverbs, that is, one-syllable
adjectives or adverbs, is the following:

SUPERL ATIVES
Short Adjectives and Adverbs

Structure: The + Adjective/Adverb -EST + Noun

It was the longest distance I’ve run.


Foi a maior distância que eu já corri.

And the following table shows the structure for long adjectives or adverbs.

SUPERL ATIVES
Long Adjectives and Adverbs

Structure: THE + MOST/LEAST + Long Adjective/Adverb + Noun

Tokyo is one of the most populated cities in the world.


Tóquio é uma das cidades mais populosas do mundo.

This is the least interesting episode of the season.


Este é o episódio menos interessante da temporada.

< voltar para o índice


270
It is important to pay attention to some spelling rules as well. For the short
adjectives or adverbs, the general rule is to add -EST to the end.

SUPERL ATIVES – SPELLING


Short Adjectives/Adverbs – General Rule: Add -EST

Adjective/Adverb The + Superlative

long the longest


longo(a) o(a) mais longo(a)

high the highest


alto(a) o(a) mais alto(a)

old the oldest


velho(a) o(a) mais velho(a)

There are other spelling cases. For the short adjectives or adverbs finishing in E,
we add -ST.

SUPERL ATIVES – SPELLING


Short Adjectives/Adverbs – Special Rules

Ending in E: Add -ST


Terminação em E: Adicionar -ST

Adjective/Adverb The + Superlative

nice the nicest


legal o(a) mais legal

safe the safest


seguro(a) o(a) mais seguro(a)

< voltar para o índice


271
For the short adjectives that finish in Y, we change Y to I and add -EST.

SUPERL ATIVES – SPELLING


Short Adjectives/Adverbs – Special Rules

Ending in Y: Change Y to I and add -EST


Short Adjectives/Adverbs – Special Rules

Adjective/Adverb The + Superlative

lucky the luckiest


sortudo(a) o(a) mais sortudo(a)

happy the happiest


feliz o(a) mais feliz

There’s also a spelling rule for the short adjectives or adverbs that end in CVC:
consonant, vowel, consonant. In this case, we double the last consonant and
add -EST.

SUPERL ATIVES – SPELLING


Short Adjectives/Adverbs – Special Rules

CVC: Double the Last Consonant and Add -EST


CVC: Dobre a Última Consoante e Adicione -EST

Adjective/Adverb The + Superlative

hot the hottest (double the T)


quente o(a) mais quente

big the biggest (double the G)


grande o(a) maior

< voltar para o índice


272
The superlative of most two-syllable adjectives and adverbs will be formed by
using the structure of the long adjectives and adverbs. However, there are some
exceptions.
Take a look:

SUPERL ATIVES
Two-syllable Adjectives – Exceptions

Ending in Y: Replace Y for -IEST


Terminação em Y: Substituir o Y por -IEST

Adjective/Adverb The + Superlative

easy the easiest


fácil o(a) mais fácil

shiny the shiniest


brilhante o(a) mais brilhante

Ending in E or LE: add -ST


Terminação em E or LE: Adicionar -ST

Adjective/Adverb The + Superlative

simple the simplest


simples o(a) mais simples

gentle the gentlest


gentil o(a) mais gentil

Ending in OW: Add -EST


Terminação em OW: Adicionar -EST

Adjective/Adverb The + Superlative

narrow the narrowest


estreito(a) o(a) mais estreito(a)

shallow the shallowest


raso(a) o(a) mais raso(a)

< voltar para o índice


273
For long adjectives or adverbs or for the two-syllable ones that do not finish in
Y, E, or OW, we’ll use: the + most + adjective or adverb.

SUPERL ATIVES – LONG ADJE CTIVES /ADVERBS


( THREE OR MORE SYLL ABLES)
The Most + Long Adjective/Adverb

The most expensive The most comfortable


O(A) mais caro(a) O(A) mais confortável

There are also irregular adjectives, which may change their form completely.

SUPERL ATIVES – IRRE GUL AR ADJE CTIVES

Adjective/Adverb The + Superlative



good the best
bom o(a) melhor

bad the worst


ruim o(a) pior

far the farthest/furthest


distante o(a) mais distante

Superlatives are often used to compare one person or thing to


other people or things of the same group.

SUPERL ATIVES – USAGE

Jackie is the most dedicated student in her class.


A Jackie é a aluna mais dedicada da turma dela.

This is the best English course.


Esse é o melhor curso de inglês.

< voltar para o índice


274
It is also possible to compare a person or thing in a situation to the
same person or thing in a different situation. In this case, we don’t
use the article the.

SUPERL ATIVES – USAGE

I am in my best shape.
Estou na minha melhor forma.

The company is facing its most difficult challenge.


A empresa está enfrentando o seu desafio mais difícil.

And now you know how to use the superlative form in English.

< voltar para o índice


275
There + To Be
The structure there + To Be expresses existence, and it can be used in the
affirmative, interrogative, and negative forms.

THERE + TO BE
Structures

Affirmative
There + To Be

There’s a restaurant near the hotel.


Há um restaurante perto do hotel.

Interrogative
To Be + There

Is there a restaurant near the hotel?


Há um restaurante perto do hotel?

Negative
There + To Be + Not

There isn’t (is not) a restaurant near the hotel.


Não há um restaurante perto do hotel.

< voltar para o índice


276
You can use the structure in the singular or plural according to the noun that follows it.

THERE + TO BE
Singular and Plural

Are there good schools in your neighborhood?


Há/Tem boas escolas no seu bairro?
(The noun “schools” is in the plural, so the verb to be is in the plural)

There is a good school in my neighborhood.


Há/Tem uma escola boa no meu bairro.
(The noun “school” is in the singular, so the verb to be is in the singular)

When we talk about singular or plural forms, there are some things to which we should pay
attention. If you are talking about a list of things, use there is when the noun that follows is
also in the singular.
If there are one or more nouns in the plural, use there are and place the nouns in the plural
before the ones in the singular, if there are any.

THERE + TO BE
Singular and Plural

There is an apple, a banana, and a pineapple in the fruit basket.


Tem uma maçã, uma banana e um abacaxi na fruteira.
(There is All nouns in the singular)

There are some apples, two bananas, and a pineapple in the fruit basket.
Tem algumas maçãs, duas bananas e um abacaxi na fruteira.
(There are One or more nouns in the plural)

< voltar para o índice


277
In informal spoken language you might as well hear there is followed by plural
nouns. This is perfectly acceptable in such case, but you should not use it in
written formal language.

THERE + TO BE
Informal Spoken Language

There’s two teachers in each classroom.


Tem dois professores em cada sala de aula.
(Informal: There is One or more nouns in the plural)

We have seen some uses of there + To Be in the present. However, it is important to highlight
that this structure can also be used in the past and in the future.
So we will conjugate the verb to be accordingly. If we are referring to the past, we use there
was for the singular and there were for the plural.

THERE + TO BE
Past: There Was / There Were

There was only one employee assisting the customers.


Só havia um funcionário auxiliando os clientes.
(“Employee” is a singular noun, so we used the verb to be in the singular: “There was”)

There were many people waiting in line.


Tinha muita gente esperando na fila.
(“People” is a plural noun, so we used the verb to be in the plural: “There were”)

To use there + To Be in the future, we’ll use there will be with singular or plural

THERE + TO BE
Future: There Will Be

There will be a mall near my house.


Haverá um shopping perto da minha casa.

There will be flying cars in the future.


Haverá carros voadores no futuro.

< voltar para o índice


278
There + To Be can also be used with modal verbs. In this case, we’ll join the idea of existence
with the meaning that each modal verb expresses.

THERE + TO BE
Modal Verbs

Structure: There + Modal Verb + To Be

There must be a gas station around.


Tem que ter / Deve haver um posto de gasolina por perto.

There should be no wait.


Não deve haver demora.

There might be a cocktail after the meeting.


Deve ter / É possível que tenha / Pode ser que haja um coquetel após a reunião.

We can also use there with verbs such as seem and tend before to be. In these
cases, we’ll use the infinitive form to be.

SUPERL ATIVES
Two-syllable Adjectives – Exceptions

Structure: There + Verb + To Be

There seems to be a lot of vacant rooms in this hotel.


Parece haver muitos quartos vazios neste hotel.
(It’s the speaker’s perspective of an impression).

There tends to be tension between the parts


Tende a haver tensão entre as partes.
(It’s something that is expected).

And now you know what there + To Be means, its structures, and how to use it.

< voltar para o índice


279
Will
The modal verb will is mostly used to refer to the future. As all modal verbs,
it functions as an auxiliary verb, adding meaning to the main verb.
Check the structures for the affirmative, interrogative, and negative forms.

WILL
Structure

Affirmative

She will go to college next year.


Ela vai para a faculdade ano que vem.

Subject + Will + Main Verb in the Base Form +


Complement (if necessary)

Negative

Will you talk to her?


Você vai falar com ela?

Will + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form +


Complement (if necessary)

Interrogative

It won’t rain.
Não vai chover.

Subject + Will + Not (Won’t) + Main Verb in the Base Form +


Complement (if necessary)

< voltar para o índice


280
Will is commonly used to express willingness and decisions about
the future that we make at the moment we speak.

WILL
Uses

Willingness and Decisions

I’ll (I + will) get the door.


Eu vou abrir a porta.

I will quit smoking.


Eu vou parar de fumar.

In the interrogative, we can use will to tell people what to do or to


make proposals. We can also use it for promises in affirmative and
negative sentences.

WILL
Uses

Tell people what to do

Will you behave now?


Você vai se comportar agora?

Make an offer / a proposal

Will you marry me?


Você quer se casar comigo?

Promises

I will always be with you.


Eu sempre estarei com você.

< voltar para o índice


281
It can be used to express refusal in the negative form.

WILL
Uses

Refusal

I won’t (will + not) talk to her.


Eu não vou falar com ela.

She won’t talk to anybody.


Ela não vai falar com ninguém.

Will is also used to refer to things that are inevitable.

WILL
Inevitability

You’ll have to attend driving classes to get your driver’s license.


Você terá que fazer aulas de direção para tirar a carteira de motorista.

Now you know that will is a modal auxiliary verb,


and you are familiar with its structures and common uses.

< voltar para o índice


282
Version 5.0

You might also like